Home

Jeep 2009 Automobile User Manual

1. Required Maintenance Intervals CO MmreomMm zon mMo2Zzr2zamazZz reZz M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 454 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MM EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change O
2. 142 146 205 448 449 uconnect Hands Free Phone 94 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 476 Universal Transmitter llle 165 Unleaded Gasoline illis 365 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 48 Upholstery Care ssec th 438 Vanity Mirrors 2 44 sk ede Ee oed ed d eee 93 Variance Compass i sue desc dea E RT RU hr 222 Vehicle Certification Label 371 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading 000 e eee eee 342 371 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage lees 283 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Viscosity Engine Oil llle 415 Voice Recognition System VR 122 Warning Flasher Hazard 394 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 202 Warning Roll Over iios ER ERR 4 Warnings and Cautions llle 7 Warranty Information scce eae eee a tae 474 Washers Windshield 149 154 420 Water Driving Through sess ears askan iusta eee 314 Waxing and Polishing ec esst eeta esia haaa 435 Wheel and Wheel Trim 00 437 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 437 Wind Buffeting 0 0006 39 174 179 Window Fogging 6 c eee eee 284 WINdOWS dex soc hag aot do e ae a 35 POWGI rm 35 Windshield Defroster 83 276 281 Windshield Washers
3. 149 154 420 nnd beh Ree OES RE ae be 420 NENNEN INDEX 501 Windshield Wiper Blades 420 Windshield Wipers 0 0 0 00 eee eee 149 Wiper Blade Replacement 0 420 Wiper Delay se ke rr eee 150 Wiper Rear sues iore meg a eine eg E dcn eg 192 Wipers Intermittent llle 150 Wipers Rain Sensitive llle 152 Wrecker Towing 3 5 ichs bush ue OP RES 404 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
4. 173 Venting Sunroof Express 173 Sunshade Operation 0 0 173 Wind Buffeting i eve re Reb gi 174 Sunroof Maintenance 174 Ignition Off Operation 174 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 li Sky Slider Full Length Open Roof NEM PEL T 185 Sky Slider Usage Precautions 175 Front Storage Compartment 185 Sky Slider Control 00 177 Console Storage Compartment 185 Opening The Sky Slider 0 0 17 W Cargo Area Features 0000 186 EN Closing The Sky Slider L 178 Cargo Load Floor 00 0 186 Anti Pinch Protect Feature 179 Wi Rear Window Features 00 192 Wind Buffeting sesers tae ete eda RR 179 Rear Window Wiper Washer Sky Slider Maintenance 179 TXRQUDDEG sipdrrkiprn ri ekes tadi we Bi Electrical Power Outlet 0 180 Rear Wadow DIGHORUSE apes ovat aetes ys Bl Power Inverter If Equipped 182 mm Rook Luggage Rack TE PQUIDDed sursis is Ia Cupheld ms iu cosas ebore RR ES 184 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the vi
5. Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil 3 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Fuel Selection 3 7L Engine 87 Octane 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Front Axle SAE 80W 90 Multi Purpose Type GL 5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent Rear Axle SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Emissions Control System Maintenance 454 W Maintenance Schedule
6. Brake System xeu eR de RE Automatic Transmission Transfer Case cns ied crm ache km ves Front Rear Axle Fluid 0 Sky Slider Top Care ce smesse sirenes Appearance Care And Protection From COPTOSIONS 3 42 S der Rd deo Hada SS Fises TT Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM H Replacement Light Bulbs Mi Bulb Replacement sese 447 Headlight ere sae dom ER EUER 447 Front Turn Signal And Front Side Marker Lights v iste Eee Re cs 448 Front Fog Light llle 448 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Back Up Lights e cneskees ERR EMEN 449 W Fluid Capacities 2 n 450 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 451 ENNE i3 da ath tears SOR EE Re 451 Chassis 2232 ke ra de eae 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L LP uox e 1 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Integrated Power Module 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control sys
7. 342 Tire Identification Number TIN 341 Tite Markings ss nu ie eR Rp ees 337 Tire Safety Information 5 337 E c 83 346 476 Air Pressure 421244 6e 49 o p enake Ss 347 Chains 40s an ed hs ao ea Hale EA CE E ho 353 Changing xi soauigia dae c SNP TE 395 Compact Spates iius es ear esee xa dd 350 General Information llle 346 High Speed 4 22 2 mega 349 Inflation Pressures llle 347 JACKING ssid tog cce sare eias do acne s 395 Life Of Tires ve cepe Dale le oe eres 352 Load Capacity llle 342 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 356 Pressure Warning Light 202 Quality Grading cse m 476 Radial i2 ve st dan ear ae Reed Reps 349 Replacement desee gaire tapa e aed 352 Rotation i24 be bee ete d e d aaps 355 DAY ki ad cones a HUE SOR ee RUE CIR aks 337 DIZES c3 pue Y pde wea bp Eg dea ed ean 339 Spare Die issue ae wales aha a T d 396 SPINNING aces oh apsida E em e mE aad 351 Tread Wear Indicators 351 To Open Hood essene piis Tatia ka Te ee 140 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 382 Torque Converter Clutch 004 301 Tow Haul Indicator Light 207 TOWING cet fois aa hee ne pete GRE ds 374 24 Hour Towing Assistance 108 en INDEX 499 Behind a Motor Home 389 Disabled Vehicle llle 404 G lde 5 23 dashheue peacer4dei c Eee RYG PX 380 Recre
8. follow this procedure carefully Continued ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403 2 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without allowing the vehicles to touch WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 3 Set the parking brake place the automatic transmis sion in PARK or NEUTRAL for manual transmission and turn the ignition OFF for both vehicles 4 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 5 Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive battery post Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery 6 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground WARNING e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing e Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are be low the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above the freezing point before attempti
9. Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole 1 when the vehicle is in a level position MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 81c4392f Drain amp Fill Plugs Adding Fluid Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Draining Fluid First remove fill plug 2 then drain plug 3 Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 25 ft Ibs 20 34 N m CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs You could damage them and cause a leak Lubricant Selection Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the fluid becomes contaminated with water Change the fluid immediately if contaminated with water Front Rear Axle Fluid Fluid Level Check The lubricant level should be at bottom edge of the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Lubricant Selection Use only manufacturer s recommended lubricant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type
10. Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the lubricant in stalled at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Lubricant changes are not neces sary unless the lubricant becomes contaminated with water Change the lubricant immediately if contaminated with water ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 Sky Slider Top Care Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and appearance and make successive cleaning easier Do not subject the top to excessive heat Frequently vacuum the top and tracks Periodically wipe dust and dirt from the top and inside of the tracks by hand with a window cleaner or alcohol dampened cloth Washing Hand washing or an automatic car wash with a soft cloth system is preferred CAUTION Avoid pointing a high pressure hand held spray wand directly at the sides of the top as this can damage the seal and force water past the weather strips General Cleaning Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles If hand washing e Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun e Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top e Wash the top with a soft natural bristle scrub brush and a mild soap solution such as liquid dish washing soap Do not use detergent Scrub in all directions covering an area of about two square feet at a time Avoid h
11. 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX but
12. 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 296 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 5 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down Shift Lock Manual Override 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used 4 Speed Automatic Transmission NOTE Under extreme cold temperatures 6 F 21 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only second gear operation Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Shift Lever Gear Ranges Do not race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a subst
13. Behind Motorhome Etc 0 389 Towing Two Wheel Drive Models 389 Towing Four Wheel Drive Models 389 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Tip Start Feature Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or
14. GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in this section for infor mation on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor mation in this section for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic e k troller i ired When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa DESNSGODUOHEC ie BOPESQHUSM tion in this section for information on replacement tires and for
15. Jeep LIBERTY 2009 owner s manual VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler LLC Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC
16. Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 461 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MM 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 2 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463 H U O 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or N Schedule 96 Months Maintenance l 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule N A Rotate tires T Change the engine oil and engine oil A Replace the engine air cleaner filter filter N 1 Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary T I Rotate tires H 1 Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine T If
17. To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing om e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a e The system will prompt you to say the number you priority level between one and seven with one being want to call the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your uconnect phone However at any a given time only one cellular phone can be in use e The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number connected to your uconnect phone The priority and then dial The number will appear in the display allows the uconnect phone to kno
18. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle is capable of towing trailers up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow This should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 380 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG ME Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine M
19. sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED NOTE Roof rack and crossbars cannot be used on vehicles equipped with Skyslider The load carried on the roof when equipped with a luggage rack must not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached NOTE Crossbars are offered by MOPAR accessories ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 External racks do not increase the total load carrying CAUTION Continued capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care luggage rack do not exceed the maximum vehicle load fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the capacity roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads CAUTION This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as pos sible and secure the load appropriately WARNING Cargo must be securely tied down befo
20. 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended 292 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG Se If Engine Falls to Start WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis Continued charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage au
21. 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed 042305232 RES Radio 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TI
22. 472 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D E In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 473 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a
23. 7 C for this outside temperature condition ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires 350 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consu
24. CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and they can damage the winch WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397 When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel Preparations For J acking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis sion or REVERSE manual transmission 4 Turn the ignition to the LOCK position 398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked J acking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the
25. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control Intermittent Wiper System is left in any position other than off Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause and allow the wipers to return to the Park between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the wind position before turning off the engine If the wiper shield wiper washer control lever to the first detent and switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur interval There are five delay settings which allow you to when the vehicle is restarted regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of two cycles Continued every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles or from a minimum of one cycle every ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph 16 km h WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use 81c0cc56 Mist Control Mist Feature Push downward on the windshield wiper wash
26. ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions uconnect studios Sat
27. GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial s
28. Inierlok ico ie id Badr S a a cce dere 147 148 Lights On Reminder suus 145 Low Fuel sees o ee 202 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 204 Map Reading rnesa samrti piiraa ae 147 Oil Pressure 24 244 re be pee ee eee 206 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 149 Park Give e eed Passe pikerik eee neared 142 143 PASSING is ave a hs vse a e ee ee 147 en INDEX 491 Rear Servicing 0 x cue cole eee Be care e qs 449 Rear Vail osc 54 4 4 op ee Ges ep a Oh a PES 449 Seat Belt Reminder less 213 DOGLVICO 24 ook 80 34 90 qd r3 Ie Gub eus 446 447 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 204 Side Marker 44s ye e ker e 448 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 202 356 Tow Haul Indicator ess 207 Traction Control llle 333 336 Transfer Case 43 ese 3k Rx E BEA Re en 305 311 Torn Signal xe eene era 83 142 146 448 449 Vanity MirrOf ece eie gc eer hee oe petats 93 Voltage cid mace sete ia iieii 205 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 202 Load Floor Cargo llle 186 Loading Vehicle llle 371 TES cakeweraeem ma dee pe ek adem vus 342 Ec EE 29 Auto Unlock 0 0 0 paese seat as 32 Atitomatic DOO 2 2 vis WR aoe ae PE 31 Child Protection 0 0 00 cece eee eee 33 DOOR x 2 ede sabe tn ode ate Be Ros eon aOR 29 Power DOO 42222 99 ek SS RS 30 Low Tire Pressure System llle 356 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren EAT
29. The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound However it will cause a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to display in the EVIC 362 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will sef illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Inf
30. Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil
31. and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE e Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging e The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection Air Conditioning Control Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e Economy Mode If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped 81c2cd46 Automatic Temperature Control Automatic Operation The Infrared Climate Control System automatically maintains the climate in th
32. dure 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof or Sky Slider if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof or Sky Slider open adjust the sunroof or Sky Slider opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee LIFTGATE NOTE Usethe power door LOCK switch on either front To open the liftgate pull up squeeze on the handle and door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE lift transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate The manual door locks on the doors and the driver s door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sen
33. ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE Chrysler LLC 81 326 0941 Second Edition Printed in U S A
34. ership for service 23 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cool ing System Pressure Cap paragraph This light indicates that the transmission fluid light turns on safely pull over and stop the 24 Transmission Temperature Indicator If Equipped temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off 25 Trip Odometer Button Changing the Display Press and release this button once to change the display from odometer to Trip A Press and release it again to change the display from Trip A to Trip B On vehicles equipped with a Base Cluster
35. in the instrument cluster is on solid HDC will NOT activate when the automatic transmis sion is in PARK e HDC will NOT activate on level ground e HDC will NOT activate at vehicle speeds above 30 mph 50 km h 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The Hill Descent button is located in the lower switch bank below the climate control Hill Descent Button Enabling HDC 1 Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section for transfer case operation information 2 Press the Hill Descent button The Hill Descent Control Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will turn on solid NOTE If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range the Hill Descent Control Indicator Light will flash for five seconds and HDC will not be enabled Disabling HDC 1 Press the Hill Descent button or shift the transfer case out of 4WD LOW range The Hill Descent Control Indicator light in the instrument cluster will turn off Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over steering and under steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver
36. latched seat could cause serious injury Recliner Adjustment The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger comfort Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear seat to recline the seatback Rear Seatback Release Strap 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of desired radio station presets The memory switch is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column The switch contains an S button to activate the memory save function It also contains a rocker switch labeled with the number 1 and the number 2 The rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of the two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the appropriate side of the switch Driver Memory Switch Programming the Memory Feature To create a new memory profile perform the following NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory 1 Turn the ignition ON ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences i e seat side mirror and radio station presets 3 Press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press the side of the rocker s
37. map 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h manual transmission or when the shift lever is in PARK auto transmission Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When on is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until On or Off appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On or Off appears 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Remote Key Unlock When Driver Doo
38. nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode or the Full Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in this section for more information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amoun
39. oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS fon MORET Inside Day Night Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror It Equipped uere po RR eem RR RES Outside Mirrors 00 0000 airi Power Mirrors eee eens Heated Mirrors If Equipped Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped ese ces seemed E uconnect phone If Equipped 94 Operation asr sc capigcae sedate es ota RS 96 Phone Call Features erus iessrersswisss 104 uconnect phone Features 107 Advanced Phone Connectivity 112 Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone lees 113 General Information 122 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Wi Voice Recognition VR System 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold Flat It Equipped sac esie wa e ERR ea 122 Feature 2 2299 P Ge ERE ERA 133 Voice Recognition VR System Operation 122 W Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 1
40. on upon the next ignition key cycle 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn off the TPMS Telltale Light as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 Telltale Light will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped
41. press and release it once again to display the outside temperature On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster press and release it once again to display the outside temperature and com pass heading in the screen below the speedometer Refer to Vacuum Fluorescent Display for details Resetting the Trip Odometer Display the trip mileage that you want to reset Trip A or Trip B Then push and hold the button approxi mately two seconds until the display resets to 0 The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odom eter ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 26 4WD Indicator Vehicles Equipped with Selec Trac II This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in AWD the full time four wheel drive auto mode In this mode the system operates with a normal torque split of 42 front axle and 58 rear axle It can redirect up to 100 of torque to the front or rear axle if necessary 27 OdometerlTrip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer button for additional information NOTE U S Federal regulations require upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify the mileage the vehicle has been driven Therefore if the odometer reading is changed because of repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage
42. studios Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 AM FM CD DVD RADIO RER REN IF Operating Instructions uconnect phone If EQUIPPED Equipped He NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side Keter io uconnect phone i Sectors of the unit s faceplate Clock Setting Procedure The REN and RER radios contain a CD DVD player USB uconnect gps RER only port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The mm for easy menu selection satellite clock
43. tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 WARNING Continued e Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running e A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the instrument clus ter Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap
44. Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid O O O C L Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 459 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing E 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule l Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires LJ If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road
45. Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 180 Auxiliary Power Outlet 00040 180 Axle Fluid s 22b RR oa RETE 452 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 452 Battery pP EE 417 Emergency Starting ces 402 Gas Caution eacebess be deseo RES EET 417 Jump Starting se eis ede b ra acreedor 402 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Belts Scab 4 eek hae Seed ee qm So Le eh ee 43 82 Body Mechanism Lubrication 419 B Pillar Location 2 2 00 s2 000006 9 oeeddu 825 342 Brake Assist System 325 Brake Assist Warning Light 208 Brake Control System Electronic 324 Brake Fluid sss d tiie RR ERR RR 452 Brake Parking 65s rkia miser oo b Res 320 Brake System cive ae uA e IE WR 429 Anti Lock ABS 0 00000 321 324 Fluid Check ede Re os 429 452 Master Cylinder sscssoo ces rssrisgr rass 429 Parking crei a sous ace ER ee Ahab ded 320 Warning Light 482 INDEX MM Brakes 42s ES uURERAGGGIREESRE QS 429 Brake Transmission Interlock 295 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 80 Brightness Interior Lights 148 Bulb Replacement 200 446 447 Bulbs Light 3er eee ws 83 446 Calibration Compass tessi 0 000000 eee 221 Capacities Fluid isset RR 450 Caps Filler Fuel Scared gusts bra anny oho ave Meare PECES d 370 OiL Engine 454 4048 e eh Gees SS 415 Power Steering cna cca ghee ee
46. HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward time expires the system will release brake pressure and gears The system will not activate if the transmission the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal The system is in PARK will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 WARNING There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist HSA will not activate and slight rolling may occur such as on minor hills i e less than 7 or with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles people and objects and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury Towing with HSA HSA will provide assistance during acceleration on an incline while towing a trailer WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming accelerati
47. Neutral Wipe Inhibit The rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON and the shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position Remote Start Wipe Inhibit Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start System The rain sensing feature will not operate when the vehicle is in remote start mode This feature will return to normal operation once remote start mode is exited Refer to Remote Start System in Section 2 of this manual for information on remote start operation 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the windshield wiper washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn off TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Steering Control Handle To unlock the steering column push the contro
48. Only When on is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on If the headlights were turned on by this feature they will also turn off when the wipers are turned off To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On or Off appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60
49. Power Seats if equipped J2 30 Amp Transfer Case Module if Green Pink equipped J9 40 Amp PZEV Flex Fuel if J3 40 Amp Rear Door Modules Green equipped Green J10 J4 25 Amp Driver Door Node J11 White J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw IOD J5 25 Amp Passenger Door Node Yellow White J14 40 Amp EBL Rear Window De J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Green fogger if equipped Green ABS Pump ESP if J15 Z equipped J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid J7 30Amp Anti Lock Brake System Green Pink ABS Valve ESP if equipped 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cav Car Mini Description Cav Car Mini Description ity tridge Fuse ity tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control Mod M3 Blue ule PCM Transmission M4 10 Amp Trailer Tow if equipped Relay Red J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan M5 25 Amp Power Inverter if Yellow Natural equipped J20 30 Amp Front Wiper M6 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 cigar Pink Yellow lighter Rain Sensor if J21 20 Amp Front Washer Rear equipped Trailer Tow if Blue Washer if equipped equipped J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module if M7 20 Amp _ Power Outlet 2 BATT White equipped Yellow ACC SELECT MI 15 Amp Stop Light Switch Feed M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seats if Blue Center High Mounted Yellow __ equi
50. Rear Wheels Front Wheels on the ground Method on the Ground Ground 2 Wheel Drive Rear driveshaft must All four wheels sus Speed less then Speed less then be removed pended OFF the 30 mph 48 km h 30 mph 48 km h and distance less than 15 miles 24 km than 15 miles 24 km and distance less 4 Wheel Drive Transfer case must be in Neutral and trans mission must be in PARK All four wheels sus pended OFF the ground NOT Permitted NOT Permitted MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 7L 409 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 410 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 410 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs lt 2 as nedaedingds err does 411 H Replacement Parts o tas xr doe kanes 412 H Dealer Service 0 0 ce ee 412 Bl Maintenance Procedures 413 Engine OIL 4 vet ee hse Geta ae aces 413 Engine Oil Filter 23422040065 ems 415 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 416 Maintenance Free Battery 417 Air Conditioner Maintenance A C Air Filter If Equipped Body Lubrication 0 0 Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid 420 Exhaust System 0 000000 0 e 421 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System 1 2 eee
51. Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that may be recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable light status if equipped Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection Cruise control status Traction stability control status Tire Pressure Monitoring System status ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great th
52. Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display
53. Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other Radio Frequency RF electronics will not cause inter ference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programm
54. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating your engine by taking the appropriate action e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped put transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING an impending overheat condition e f your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C WARNING system adds heat to the engine cooling system and e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous turning the A C can help remove this heat Th
55. Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only 030907089 Manual Seat Adjustment Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear ward Release the bar once the seat is in the position 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ae desired Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Recliner Adjustment The recliner control is on the outboard side of the seat Seatback Release Lever To recline the seat lean forward slightly and lift the lever Then lean back to the position desired and release the lever To return the seatback to its normal upright posi tion lean forward and lift the lever Release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you c
56. a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 32 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds when the vehicle security system is arming and then flash slowly when the system is armed The light will also turn on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned ON en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 33 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for six to
57. a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle AIways be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions Howev
58. accident causing serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 When you press the VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR button and say Help or Main Menu 124 UNDERSTANDING THE
59. button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
60. change the frequency Next Station to select the next station Previous Station to select the previous station Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number Next Channel to select the next channel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels Select Name to say the name of a channel Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands Track to change the track Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track Main Menu to switch to the main menu 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the VR button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue re
61. cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean leather upholstery Ap plication of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner dire
62. conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary M Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system ood Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 460 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MM 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OCO CO C O C L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings repla
63. control at or between and J then turn the air HUMID CONDITIONS conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 7 and turn 65696 the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between 646 rapis i and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near 4J If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between J and In very cold weather CC AD if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 4 045605922 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 0 0 Normal Starting 00 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C ieee ab er ee Ee deeded Cae es If Engine Fails To Start After Starting esce y on an ee H Engine Block Heater If Equipped ll Automatic Transmission 00 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 0 00000 Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Puede fruge e fare 4 Speed Automatic Transmission ll Four Wheel Drive Operation MP1522 Command Trac Transfer Case If Equipped 5 4 2 ke ena 302 MP3022 Selec Trac II Transfer Case If Equipped so cocco ena ma eo 308 Bl On Road Driving Tips 313 288 STA
64. due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn 364 STARTING AND OPERATING ME on upon the next ignition key cycle In addition the EVIC will display a Low Pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires 4 The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure value The EVIC will also display a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to remind you to service the flat tire Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monit
65. enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 81bcd6b2 1 Driver Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size The front passenger airbag is also certified to the Federal regulations that define Occupant Classification refer to information on Occupant Classification System in this section This vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags to protect the driver and the front and rear p
66. front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types alae ese Display Poraa Type 16 Digit us e Personality Porenliy Display Public Public No program type or un None Rhythm and Blues R amp B defined iei i DIE GNIS Religious Music Rel Musc ult Hits PEE Religious Talk Rel Talk Classical Classicl Rock Rock Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft College ollege Soft Rock Soft Rck Country SRELEY Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports i L pors ports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz News News Top t M Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If
67. in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the Sky Slider while operating the Sky Slider switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Sky Slider Control The Sky Slider switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 034305976 Sky Slider Switch NOTE The Sky Slider switch will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position Opening the Sky Slider Using Automatic Mode Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the Sky Slider will open from the front and move automatically toward the rear of the vehicle Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the Sky Slider will open from the rear and move automatically toward the front of the vehicle NOTE e During operation any movement of the Sky Slider switch will stop the Sky Slider roof e To resume the operation from a partially open posi tion press and release the switch a second time e The Sky Slider will not open from the front and the rear at the same time The Sky Slider must close fully before opening it from the opposite end 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Using Operator Mode Press the switch rearward and hold it the Sky Slider will open from the front and move toward the
68. is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your uconnect tunes REN or RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition Hr Taas or he ratio System VR If Equipped 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed The Section 3 clock setting menu will appear on the screen 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings
69. is properly tight ened Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar 372 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG ME This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating
70. level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M dipstick Adding 1 quart 0 9 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for information on this system NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recom mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 Engine Oil Viscosity
71. minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illumination Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and hold the RESET button until Off 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Park Assist System If Equipped When on is selected the system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Sec tion 3 of this manual for system function and operating information To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On or Off appears UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to HSA Hill Start Assist under Electronic Brake Control sex m som of Qe me mo wen m System in Section 5 of this manual for system function zji and operating information To make your selection press E and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On om or Off appears SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC C
72. never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Towing in this section for more information be fore towing a trailer with your vehicle Trailer Sway Control TSC If Equipped If TSC activates while towing a trailer stop the TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the sively swaying trailer TSC activates automatically once trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway the excessively swaying trailer is recognized When TSC is functioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash on un 328 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG ME WARNING Continued The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate e Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury The vehicle must be stopped l e The vehicle must be on a 7 or greater incline Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline If ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline backing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission period If the driver does not apply the throttle before this the
73. new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift the indicator light for the previous position will remain on and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift move the 4WD Control Switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again 2WD to 4WD Lock Move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after mov ing the 4WD Control Switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either OFF or RUNNING This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position NOTE The four wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the selected position indicator light will flash and the original posi tion indicator light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift There may be a delay up to 10 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be experienced due to uneve
74. oerte gt he eR REESE 146 To Set a Desired Speed 156 Pagh Beam TOW Bian Pelee WHE apii id To Deactivate iei RR m 157 Flash To Pass 1 0 0 eee eee eee 147 To Resume Speed 157 Interior Lights lessen 147 To Vary The Speed Setting 157 A y iea d Wipe One Washer iii id To Accelerate For Passing 158 Intermittent Wiper System 150 Mist Eeatutfe esso e x Y EE E 2 151 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee H Rear Park Assist System If Equipped System Usage Precautions Enabling And Disabling The System System Operation 000 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped Programming HomeLink Gate Operator Canadian Programming Using Homelink s Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button 06 SeCUEILY sua tuae tee v te e dna ee Troubleshooting Tips lessen General Information 0 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 171 Opening Sunroof Express 172 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 172 Closing Sunroof Express 172 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 173 Pinch Protect Feature 0 173 Pinch Protect Override
75. or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor 358 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor
76. position indicator lights will be on or flashing Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL and the engine RUNNING With the transfer case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK Shifting Out of NEUTRAL Perform the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 392 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG ME 2 Reconnect the battery negative cable 3 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position if it has been moved or the engine has been started 4 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine 5 Press the brake pedal 6 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 7 Use the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object to press the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button Re lease the NEUTRAL button after the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off approximately one second After the NEUTRAL button is released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the selector switch 8 Start the engine 9 Shift the transmission into DRIVE 10 Set the parking brake 11 Shift the transmission into PARK NOTE Steps 1 through 6 are requirements for shifting the transfer case If these requirements are not met prior to depre
77. position of cargo and passengers can seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a tie down could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway Continued 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ae WARNING Continued e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or pro
78. prior to performing the tire rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing
79. right away e The Occupant Classification System OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle It is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag for an empty seat and for occupants classified in a category other than that of an adult This could be a child teenager or even a small size adult 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE Children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint e The Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off The PAD Indi cator Light illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the passenger airbag will not inflate even though the PAD Indicator Light is not illumi nated Indicator Light Location en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The PAD Indicator Light should not be illuminated when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger seat In this case the airbag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs For all other occupants the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated indicating that the front pa
80. search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 256 UNDE
81. show dashes for two seconds Then the history informa tion will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being di
82. surfaces only 4WD Low 4 Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive Locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in this section for more information Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The four wheel drive indicator lights AWD and 4 LOW are located in the instrument cluster The NEUTRAL indicator light is located on the 4WD Control Switch If there is no indicator light on or flashing the transfer case position is two wheel drive 2WD If the indicator light is on the desired position 4WD LOCK 4WD LOW or NEUTRAL has been obtained If one or more shift requirements are not met e An indicator light will flash e The transfer case will not shift NOTE The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the electric shift four wheel drive system If this light re mains on after engine start up or it illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required 306 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG Se Shifting Procedures NOTE If any of the requirements to select a
83. the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the Brake Warning Light shows system failure Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling point than the recommended product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged
84. the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel The l
85. the front passenger seat components or airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the assembly outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure components in any way you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated The following requirements must be strictly adhered to e Atno time should any Supplemental Restraint System SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler LLC Mopar en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly or its related com ponents may inadvertently change the airbag deploy ment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS If a Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Controlle
86. the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transp
87. the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for additional warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Se
88. the molding and appears on the Auto NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title 8 INTRODUCTION EBENEN VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E A Word About Your Keys 12 Ignition Key Removal llus 12 Key In Ignition Reminder 14 H Sentry Key alors csaxuoesa RE Rd fe a 14 Replacement Keysis ce re terese rit tasess 16 Customer Key Programming 16 General Information 17 li Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 18 Rearming Of The System 18 To Arm The System sse eses herioa To Disarm The System llus Bi Illuminated Entry System 0 0 ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate To Lock The Doors And Liftgate To Unlatch The Liftgate Flip Up Window Express Down Window Feature If Equipped ener RR ics Using The Panic Alarm 2
89. time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Changing the Time Zone SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX J ACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on EIEJEAESAESEMIS the screen Ca Tr SINGLE D MPa
90. tire damage or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ME These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the indicators appear in two or more adjacent grooves the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommend
91. using your vehicle for any of the E J Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes following Dusty or off road conditions 4 Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the engine air cleaner filter S 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet replace if necessary c off road or frequent trailer towing T Inspect the brake linings replace if E necessary D Inspect the CV joints U Inspect exhaust system L J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends E and boot seals replace if necessary S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 464 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MM 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary LJ Inspect the front and rear axle f
92. vehicle in or out of the area 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replac
93. will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window control on the other doors press and release the window LOCK button setting it in the down position To enable the window controls press and release the window LOCK button again setting it in the up position Window Lockout Switch en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Reset It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the Auto Up feature To do so perform the following proce
94. with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either OFF or RUNNING This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position 2WD or 4WD Auto to 4WD Low When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or its occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h using the Preferred Procedure or completely stopped using the Alternate Procedure Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine RUNNING slow the vehicle speed to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is on not flashing shift the transmission into gear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine OFF or RUNNING shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is on not flashing shift the transmission into gear NOTE Steps 1 and 2 in the Preferred Procedure and the Alternate Procedure are requirements for shifting the transfer case If these requirements are not met prior to attem
95. 0 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or
96. 07 uconnect phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every uconnect phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may Towing Assistance not be appl
97. 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The uconnect phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the uconnect phone will provide notification to inform you of your p
98. 36 Commands seses ras ACER STER Sena 124 Programming The Memory Feature 136 Voice Training llle 127 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless W Seats ixioxas dedu RARE deh Gees 127 f EC M iis Manual Front Seat Adjustments 127 ii Epsilon Recah S o douce voie ad Recliner Adjustment 6 128 pees S l UNAM bii en 139 Pyne EPPO TT eves ieia Me E To Open And Close The Hood 140 Je oen cca CR Gare eden nemieenetdenecioe uo Power Seat If Equipped csse 130 Exterior And Interior Lighting Control 142 Head Restraints 6 02 00 eee 131 sila a eile GUNT EL Hope Heated Seats If Equipped 132 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 143 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Headlights With Wipers Available With Headlights With Wipers Available With Auto Headlights Only 143 Auto Headlights Only 152 Headlight Time Delay If Equipped 144 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 152 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Windshield Washers Equipped ee eg eee bs 144 WI Tilt Steering Column DES EORUM cweniteeqendopenpans Hm ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 155 Fog Lights I EQUIDBSO s srs irda ene To Activate cese 156 Turn Signals
99. 4 Programming Additional Transmitters 25 Battery Replacement 25 General Information 0 26 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 27 How To Use Remote Start 27 Mi Door Locks 0 0 cee ee 29 Manual Door Locks 00 29 Power Door Locks 0 0 000005 30 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear DOGS 265 5 ae rests tink a Nude aoa aes 33 Ba Windows 23 6465 RR evevene ds 35 Power Windows essere 35 Wind Buffeting B Liftgate Liftgate Flipper Glass ll Occupant Restraints Lap Shoulder Belts 0 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt Pretensioner If Equipped Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped Energy Management Feature Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Extender 0 000004 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Exhaust GaS s ud p due RE Bat EUN 81 Restraint System SRS Airbags 53 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Child Restraint eter RR Rp 71 Vehicle 2 gts eile ng Gang he oh Ro E End ll Engine Break In Recommendations 80 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Sa
100. 41 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 192 Light Bulbs 22er et be nna gee RUE 83 446 lights dindot4 ove re Re ti eee ak ee Yn 83 142 Airbag ess trede quce he dig a 68 83 215 Anti Lock Automatic Headlights 6 143 Pack Upi i96 dri dodge wa HORE ase ia he 449 Battery Saver 148 Brake Assist Warning 208 336 Brake Warming ccs wale ice res RR P a 213 Bulb Replacement 446 447 Garg tree sti ah ees ale be was 148 Courtesy Reading i222 e 40 147 Cruise serere oad eyes eser od E REAR E Wd 3 213 Daytime Running i9 99e ew eR s 144 Dimmer Switch Headlight 142 147 Electronic Stability Program ESP INDICATOR see ere eua 208 333 336 Engine Temperature Warning 208 EX eriOE es esa deba Specs dea a thas ox ea Rs 83 OB cat sake ety eh ay ohh ea cs 145 205 448 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 207 208 211 305 311 Hazard Warning Flasher 394 Headlight Switch 04 142 143 490 INDEX MM Headlights ux aae Syr tuent qud 143 447 Headlights On Reminder 145 Headlights On With Wipers 143 152 High Beast amp 222geck u p ERE Ra os 147 205 High Beam Indicator 205 High Beam Low Beam Select 147 Hill Descent Control Indicator 207 331 Ill minated Entty 4 22i ee 19 Instrument Cluster less 142 202 Intensity Control skr reos ey ea 148
101. 4WD Control Switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be 308 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG Se operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing MP3022 Selec Trac Ill Transfer Case If Equipped Operating Information and Precautions The Selec Trac II9 active on demand transfer case pro vides four positions e Two wheel drive 2WD high range e Four wheel drive Auto AWD AUTO high range e Neutral N e Four wheel drive 4WD low range This transfer case is intended to be driven in either the two wheel drive position 2WD or the four wheel drive Auto position 4WD AUTO for normal street and high way conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads For added capability when traversing steep grades rough terrain or extremely poor traction surfaces select the transfer case 4WD LOW position This position locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed while multiplying engine torque Use the transfer case NEUTRAL position for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in this section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of NE
102. 68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the Learn or Training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed
103. 76 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 477 Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating bas
104. 9 eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light does not turn on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer 34 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Compass Display If Equipped On vehicles equipped with a Premium Cluster this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster this display shows the compass heading N S E W NE NW SE and SW and the outside temperature ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 041006221 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e System Status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Tire Pressure Monitor System if equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass display Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e Navigation system screens if equipped e Audio mode display The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the
105. 9 in 22 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in 51 cm and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 in 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine transmission axle transfer case to assure they have not been contaminated Con taminated fluids and lubricants milky foamy in appear ance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage Driving In Snow Mud and Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shif
106. ARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu displays in the EVIC 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will display in the EVIC 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the right rear quarter window This is where the compass sensor is located 040506040 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi mately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the
107. ARNING Continued e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Continued the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion Continued 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued WARNING e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by
108. CEL seacara d enit a d atris e Perea 74 76 Lubrication Body 2 45244 eres 419 Luggage Carrier syes aces a eS ea e Ue oS ee 194 Lumbar Support 44i ke Eee xe ed 129 Maintenance Free Battery 44 417 Maintenance General leen 413 Maintenance Procedures illius 413 Maintenance Schedule Ln 454 Maintenance Sunroof 000 0 eee ee 174 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 204 411 Manual Service sisses auna eae ee eee 475 492 INDEX ae Manual Transmission Lubricant Selection ills 452 Map Reading Lights 04 147 Marker Lights Side osos o n 448 Master Cylinder Brakes 05 429 Memory Feature Memory Seat 136 Memory Seat aka s dake ed d RUE RR area 136 Memory Seats and Radio 136 Methanol eee 366 Mini Irip Computer ore ese 4e ne ee 219 Mirrors sentra ekpa a n Eea Da D TUO 90 Automatic Dimming llle 90 Electric Powered llle 92 Electric Remote raciiata oE e e er EN 92 Heated i aaah eaan ha E Erg ex 93 Outside eud pa aae r Pi eu Es Ca dex eee Os 91 Rearview 34 e462 co eek c aw dae ea d e 3s 90 Vanity ise ese aes oe Bae ae EQUES 93 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 356 Mopat Parts i5 uer Ud e e he eae ora as 412 474 MIBE ETBE 2222 x bene saa 366 Multi Function Contro
109. D DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX J ACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042005200 REO Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button uconn
110. D LOW for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driv ing through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of
111. DERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Displa No program type or md None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Program Type 16 Di
112. DEX 487 Materials Added 0 00000 368 Methanol 200522023403 e ex pias 366 Octane Rating lt eseese eneren e 365 451 Requirements 4 2 2 eee persti es 365 Specifications essa na a panana SOR CR anae ALS 451 Tank Capacity sucks sae reu E Reds 450 Fuel System Caution 0000000000 370 Fueling serep edu da berba P d aes 370 UL E 440 Garage Door Opener Homelink9 165 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 370 410 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge 00 202 Gasoline Clean Air llle 366 Gasoline Fuel elles 365 Gasoline Reformulated 366 Gauges Coolant Temperature 000 209 Fuel cay i vag ieee se bee GE e Ru E 202 Odometet sium sea gece wee awe ce E 211 Speedometer 2 0 2 ey er cie a nnn 205 Tachometer 04 ac 5 2502 vx aendechays 207 Gear Ranges 24 44 e eA e Meee ak E 297 General Information 17 26 122 365 General Maintenance llle 413 Glass Cleaning ss ai k ead tesa Shans as oe EE 439 Gross Axle Weight Rating 372 375 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 372 374 GVWR zia gerus he Ru bue eee et 372 Hands Free Phone uconnect 0 94 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 0 0 0 0 0 eee eae 314 Hazard Warning Flasher 5 394 Head Restraints leeren 131 Head R st os vue we eae qe p eae 131 Headlights sac
113. E The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage it Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F
114. EATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever upward or downward and the corresponding turn signal indicator on the instru ment panel will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights Turn Signal Control 031406007 You can signal a lane change by moving the multifunc tion lever upward or downward partially without mov ing beyond the detent If either turn signal indicator has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the multifunction lever is moved see your authorized dealer for service ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Flash To Pass Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds before activating the flash to pass function again Interior Lights Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console and above the rear doors by the grab handles Each light is turned on
115. ECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP E eae DEFROST AND WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN oweamoun et uA CONTROL DgIVF BRAKE f q h Tow t3 Up Pp D Kod 6 A n BATTERY MEATED MIRROR WINDSHELD INSTRUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOUMIDOR WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON wa o GQ Noc Lh BA uw GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDING DOOR M n UGHTER pe gi HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER CHILDREN LATCH DRIVE LOW Coo mt 5 eet a MALFUNCTION TRANS SEE OWNERS INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINTSYSTEM AIRBAG OFF CAerowe TOPUP MANUAL 180 010505550 INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind i shield This number also is stamped into the right front Vehicle Identification Number door sill under
116. ES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a mm language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Subtitle Language If Equippe
117. FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Commands The Voice Recognition VR system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni tion VR system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands Frequency to
118. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving
119. Indicator Light will turn on pM when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and it will stay on for two seconds If the light stays on or turns on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required 22 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi TET tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and CAUTION stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve Driving with a hot engine cooling system could hicle If the temperature reading does not return to damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H normal turn the engine off immediately and call for pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops for more information back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal
120. L 273 CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System 81c2cd2b Manual Temperature Control The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner pushbuttons Blower Control Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O Off position There are four blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equ
121. Location 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 80135497 Front Jacking Location ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ib 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to it s fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the
122. ME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control kno
123. MOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate open the liftgate flip up window or activate the PANIC alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system However the line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects when using the RKE transmitter NOTE Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis ables all buttons on the RKE transmitter 020207279 Vehicle Key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illumi nated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors and the liftgate on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 For vehicles not equipped wi
124. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer 376 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Trailer Sway Control Electronic Refer to TSC Trailer Sway Control under Electronic Brake Control System in this section for information on this system Trailer Sway Control Mechanical The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distr
125. Mute off 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa press the VOICE REC OGNITION button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the uconnect phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone and the uconnect phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired
126. OF YOUR VEHICLE ME POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC 150 other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watt maximum power outlet located on the back of the Watts Certain high end video games such as Playsta center console tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools Due to built in overload protection the power outlet will shut down if the power rating is exceeded Each device to be powered should be checked first to make sure it does not exceed the outlet s 150 Watts maximum rating A control switch for the outlet is located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls 115 Volt 150 Watt Power Outlet ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 NOTE Due to built in overload protection the power outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC 150 Watt maximum power rating is exceeded WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an 115 Volt 150 Watt Power Outlet Switch electric shock and failure Press and release the switch once to turn on the power outlet A status indicator in the switch will illuminate in approximately one second to indicate that power is available at the outlet Press and r
127. Pa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Loca
128. RSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones ee UN
129. RTING AND OPERATING ME E Off Road Driving Tips 314 Traction Control System TCS 325 When To Use 4WD Low Range 314 Brake Assist System BAS 325 Driving Through Water scce rece pretesi 314 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 326 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 315 Trailer Sway Control TSC Hill Climbing seen 316 alee ee a jd Traction Downhill 2 6 6 0 eee 317 FUNCIONE eaei ieS After Driving Off Road 0000000 317 d Me da NN Mi Power Steering sseeeeeeeeses 318 El ctronie Stability Progr m ESP oss 332 Power Steering Fluid Check 319 ESP BAS Warning Light And ESP TCS M Parking Brake 22140408 kx ex RE 320 Indicator Light eR Ex RE a rs 336 H Anti Lock Brake System 5 44 eese 321 Wi Tire Safety Information 337 H Electronic Brake Control System 324 Tire MISTER 337 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 324 Tire Identification Number TIN 341 es STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 342 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 356 Mi Tires General Information 346 Dass Syst
130. S TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is from one to two years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry 2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed Liftgate closed e Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will
131. SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change NOTE For best access to the oil filter a
132. System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings X The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system recei
133. T PANEL 281 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel gt gt Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor y Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost Qv Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM e Air Conditioner Control Press this b
134. TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION iei t eS 9e 8 oe um AU o cR Uie EEE SUR UR CR UR EADE ANAE 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ecelesie mn 8 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee hh nn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eee esee eee hh n nn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc ccc c cece reer ewer hh hh i hn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 0 ccc cece ccc ccc c ccc r cece hh hh hh nnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4csse ccsseev5ieescessceceseecseevicecseec 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ccc ewes ccc creer he nn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 cee ccc ccc reer cece cece hh hh hn 10 INDEX 4 9 huma ER E 3h E HEU A EU e Gnd E Q4 8 901 BNE 3 9 AUR Ru P o d Roe ique dg s INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction 0 0 00 ee 4 Warnings And Cautions 0 7 H Rollover Warning 24 c00s0 e Rer 4 Vehicle Identification Number 7 Bl How To Use This Manuadl Ls 5 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in th
135. These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a sing
136. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation
137. Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the uconnect phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condit
138. UTRAL CAUTION e The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose or slippery road surfaces only Driving in this posi tion on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline components Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 CAUTION Continued WARNING When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the e You or others could be injured if you leave the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD position or 4WD AUTO position at a given road speed Take care not to over speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles de pends on tires of equal size type and circumfer ence on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the powertrain and it will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury Continued 310 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG ME WARNING Continued e Since four whee
139. Wiper System 152 Rear Axle Differential 0 432 Rear Park Sense System 000050 158 Rear Seat Folding 0 00 00 cee 133 Rear Window Defroster 00 193 Rear Window Features 00 192 Rear Wiper Washer sees 192 Rearview Mirrors llle 90 Reclining Front Seats 0000006 128 Recreational Towing 0 000000 e 389 Reformulated Gasoline 0 05 366 Refrigerant nies cease E RE Dex e s hia 419 Release Hood ec ee eee 140 Reminder Lights On s secs se teise aatia toes 145 Reminder Seat Belt 00000000008 49 Remote Control Starting System 1 eee 27 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 271 Remote Starting System llle 27 Replacement Bulbs 0000000 446 en INDEX 495 Replacement Keys 0 00000 cee 16 Replacement Parts 412 Replacement Tires lt s s artone ta mi osni 00 000 352 Reporting Safety Defects n annann nanna 474 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 212 218 Restraint Head 0 0 00 cee eee eee 131 Restraints Child 0 0 0 0 eee eee 71 Restraints Occupant 4 sss ess ee a ddan 42 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 190 Roll Over Warning iacu ee ERR EY 4 Roof Sky Slider Power 1 0 000 000 0004 174 433 Roof Type Carrier groteskia eee 194 Ro
140. a from the Occupant Classification Module OCM The ORC will detect rollovers but not rear impacts The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position These include all of the items listed above except the Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light the instrument panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and they will not inflate e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning Light and PAD Indicator Light for six to eight seconds as a self check when the igni tion is first turned ON After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off The PAD Indicator Light will function normally refer to infor mation on Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag 0 Y en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked
141. a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between gt Playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc e These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped e V
142. ach wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the powertrain and it will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury Continued 304 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG Se WARNING Continued e Since four wheel drive provides improved trac tion there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road con ditions permit You or others could be injured Shift Positions The electronic transfer case switch is located on the center console next to the shift lever 81c686ba 4WD Control Switch 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is used for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 4WD Lock 4 Wheel Drive High Range This range locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose or slippery road
143. ack and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate located on the B Pillar is just above your seatback Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision Continued Latch Plate To Buckle 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued WARNING A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more A lap belt worn too high can increas
144. ained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 480 INDEX MM About Your Brakes ss srs irea sa haitia ia a 320 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 321 324 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 425 Adding Fuel resterer tenses ms 370 Additives Fuel 0 0 00 0c eee eee 368 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 416 Air Conditioner Maintenance 418 Air Conditioning 53e bebe Pa ee s 274 Air Conditioning Controls 274 Air Conditioning Filter 284 419 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 285 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 418 419 Air Conditioning System 274 277 A18 Air Filtet saa Gaye it cae ee De eae ra i 416 Air Pressure Tires 2 0 20 00 cee eee nee 347 AUPDag cessa eed tha ge wad e hp Ee Ren 53 Airbag Deployment llle 65 Airbag Light ee ey eae tae bees 68 83 215 Airbag Maintenance 0 0000 ee eee 67 Alarm Panie 2222 due Eae E
145. al or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 340 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG Se EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire DOT Department of Transportation standards an
146. al tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle 370 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is designed for use with this vehicle 81937590 Fuel Filler Cap CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel
147. aler 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule l Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Rotate tires Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MM 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary l Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 467 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or Schedule 150 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine
148. alers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C Air Filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cl
149. and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations Oo O oT Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn 057003766 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground Mr pr n G E 9 Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 057003765 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes STARTING AND OPERATING 387 388 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG Se Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range you will want to activate the TOW HAUL feature Refer to Au tomatic Transmission in this section for additional in formation NOTE Using the TOW HAUL feature while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will im prove performance and extend transmission life by re ducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continu
150. ansfer case 4WD LOCK position or 4WD LOW position This position locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Use the transfer case NEUTRAL position for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in this section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of NEUTRAL CAUTION e Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front wheels or rear wheels are spinning The MP1522 Command Trac transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the speed of the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front wheels or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 CAUTION Continued WARNING The 4WD LOCK position and 4WD LOW position e You or others could be injured if you leave the are intended for loose or slippery road surfaces only Driving in these positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD position or 4WD LOCK position at a given road speed Take care not to over speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles de pends on tires of equal size type and circumfer ence on e
151. apers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner
152. ar 1 First This range is used for hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression brak ing at low speeds ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled 4th speed OVERDRIVE The trans mission will automatically shift from 3rd gear to OVER DRIVE if the following conditions are present the shift lever is in DRIVE the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h the TOW HAUL button has not been activated the transmission has reached normal operating temperature will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desir able gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illu minate and the transmission may downshift out of OVERDRIVE until the transmission cools down After the transmission cools down the transmission will resume normal operation The transmission will dow
153. assengers sitting next to a window They are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG 8192b898 Window Airbag Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not put anything on or around the front and e Do not have any accessory items installed which side curtain airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers These items may cause serious injury during inflation airbag The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Continued Along with the seat belts the front airbags provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side Curtain Airbags also work with seat belts to im prove occupant prot
154. at you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s Size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lowe
155. atback Release 1 0 0 0 eee 133 T ng ste etic ius catok EE nra ehens 2s 130 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 214 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 424 451 selection OF Oll 2440244424 20deeaun gs rede 414 Selec Trac Operation 0 00000 ee eee 308 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 14 Sentry Key Programming 00 16 Sentry Key Replacement 00 16 Service Assistance llle eee 471 Service Contracts La uns Ped ea ders sees 473 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator lessen 204 Service Manuals 2 000000 eee 475 Setting the Clock sos x 229 243 246 255 Settings Personal 4s cm een 223 Shift Lock Manual Override 295 Shifting Automatic Transmission less 296 Transfer Case 22 ignes 302 304 308 310 Shoulder Belts 0 0 eee 43 Side View Mirror Adjustment 91 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 284 Signals TUTN sisse hts 83 146 205 448 449 Sky Slider Power Roof iilii 174 433 Snow Chains Tire Chains 353 Spare Tire us usd dees Fo bak dados alee es 350 396 en INDEX 497 Spark PMS cos te S EXERCERE d 451 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 2 secre ges 451 OL caca s dp ERE d koe aee ad ede eus 414 451 Speed Control Cruise Control 155 Speedometer eese er hw eame ae 205 s rig MEE 27 291 Cold Weat
156. ation of the protectant CAUTION Avoid getting Scotchguard on the surrounding weather strips moldings paint or glass Damage to these items might occur ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 Weather Strip Care Lubricate the weather strips periodically with MOPAR Weather Strip Lubricant to keep them soft and pliable Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle r
157. ational 0 ee eee ee eee 389 Weight eig pee iene cial eral REESS 380 Towing Assistance 4 rh mer 108 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 389 Traction Control 22i E PR e 325 Trailer Sway Control TSC 327 Trailer TOWING euer mee iR wee 374 Cooling System Tips estres dre aissa ditas 389 Hitches 1213 990 dox 9 Per E eA ae a 379 Minimum Requirements sess 383 Trailer and Tongue Weight 382 Mating cues ace og aa a sr poa eR She s 386 Trailer Towing Guide iilii 380 Trailer Weight si RR RES 380 Transaxle os orreina he a E aioe oleae S 294 Automatic issued eas EX e URGE Rs 294 Op ration ens cena Ma Sues RE PEE 294 Transfer Case 2 ss mre Rega 431 MUG ities os em eR ES RARE 431 452 Four Wheel Drive Operation 302 Maintenance sss saraaa si Sa aces EUER a 431 TrarismissiOD 2 6 uo Seed c e eg 296 Automate 4 sg dd xxv are ame i sla E Rae dear 296 Fluid 205 22 02 Pea4 ARR Undo e nari 452 Maintenance wie ace E ox aee SR CR RR 430 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 00 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink n ss carpet RR eder Eee 165 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 00 20 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Tread Wear Indicators 0050 Trip Odometer i 464694 ese Ix cag deeds Trip Odometer Reset Button 500 INDEX M Turn Signals
158. aust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO Refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehi
159. b out of the socket and insert the replace ment bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 5 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the fog light housing and rotate the connector clockwise to lock it in place ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 6 Close the hood Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Back Up Lights 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the screws that fasten the taillight housing to the vehicle 3 Pull the taillight housing straight back to separate it from the vehicle 4 Disconnect the electrical connector 5 Remove the two screws that fasten the back plate to the taillight housing 6 Separate the back plate from the taillight housing 7 Pull the appropriate bulb s out of the back plate and insert the replacement bulb s 8 Install the back plate and screws into the taillight housing 9 Connect the electrical connector 10 Install the taillight housing and screws 11 Close the liftgate 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 19 5 Gallons 73 8 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 Quarts 4 7 Liters Cooling System 3 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula 14 Quarts 13 3 Liters
160. b to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6
161. be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e n a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the uconnect phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Voice Tree Main Menu i English Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated with entry is dialed Number is Dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Phonebook Entries Listed one Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available V
162. ble to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioner and seat belt retractor assem bly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Classification Sys tem serviced as well Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment with the vehicle stopped the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following func tions Cuts off fuel to the engine Flashes hazard lights Turns on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlocks the doors automatically NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring in
163. braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Your vehicle is equipped with a capped transmission oil fill tube that is sealed and it should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this sec tion for the correct fluid type Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals Transfer Case
164. bration tanssia 221 Compass Variance aue sita eiea Cierre 222 Computer Trip Travel ss saras dsa aiek ansas 219 Console estretes seteriai is dae d Rr 185 Console Floor so ckers esra bL BR E ik 185 Contract Service uuu supe a Rue a cua 473 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 426 Cooling System ccs os RI RR RR r iai 423 Adding Coolant Antifreeze s s 425 Coolant Capacity essa amiko e aa aaa 450 Coolant Level 0 0 0 0 aeaa 423 427 Disposal of Used Coolant 427 Drain Flush and Refill 424 Inspection 2 6 ee 427 Points to Remember 000 00005 428 Pressure Cap shack a see aed asasi 426 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 424 450 451 Corrosion Protection leere 435 Cruise Light 25 62 92 L9 RR REPE 213 Cupholder s i ex e Re CR e RR 184 Customer Assistance sls 471 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 149 Daytime Running Lights 144 Dealer Service lees 412 Defroster Rear Window ss 193 Defroster Windshield Delay Intermittent Wipers Diagnostic System Onboard Dimmer Control 484 INDEX NENNEN Dimmer Switch Headlight 147 Dipsticks Oil Engine uere te RRRRER se awe ea ex 413 Power Steering nici ce obec ne ea ps 319 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 427 Engine OI s sone aie sry ea
165. by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned completely upward to the second detent High Beam Functions 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See Cargo Light The cargo light is mounted in the headliner above the rear cargo area This light will turn on when you open the liftgate or any door or if you press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or rotate the dimmer control on the multifunction lever completely upward to the second detent Battery Saver Feature To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the multifunction lever It controls the operation of the interior lights and the brightness of the instrument panel lights Dimmer Control Instrument Panel Dimming With the parking lights or headlights on rotate the dimmer control upward or downward to change the brightness of the instrument panel lights ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control to the first detent to brighten the odometer and
166. by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mo
167. cale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate 374 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG ME CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for t
168. can be determined Vehicle Warning Messages When the appropriate conditions exist messages such as door door ajar gATE liftgate ajar gLASS flip up glass ajar gASCAP fuel cap fault LoW tirE low tire pressure or CHANgE OIL will display mm in the odometer LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles NOTE If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC then most warnings will display in the EVIC 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Fuel Cap Fault Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the words gASCAP will display in the odometer If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Change Oil Message Base And Mid Line Clusters Only Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil c
169. ce if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a O O O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary
170. ceo pag ens ase as 142 143 10 488 INDEX MM Automate 3122s cR RBS Np ae See xu 143 Bulb Replacement 000 447 Cleaning ces arag red PPP be NEP ddr 439 Delay irem oS race re hee Seen dors 144 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 147 Lights On Reminder sssssss 145 On With Wipers sese 143 152 Passing 2243 e Puch E RE esseeri 147 Replacing ei oak on fetes wah eee eae a a 447 WICH 2 wur deed Ps Pe ened ba ee eg 142 143 Time Delay xe desees ae RR esas 144 Heated Mirrors llle 93 Heated Seats ee ee eee 132 Heater csse erri ew EPI 274 Heater Engine Block spustene e eias 293 High Beam Indicator 0000 205 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 147 Hill Descent Control 000000 331 Hill Descent Control Indicator 207 331 Hill Start Assist penne d Oe we Oe 328 Hitches Trailer Towing 0 0 2 0 0 e eee eee 379 Holder Com i 4 2 424 ed ote eid O24 ae GA 185 Holden Cup esed ce e nek eee es d 184 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 165 Hood Release 0 0 0 cee ee 140 ISHITION 2 iu acicesn we RB a dod OR ak he 12 Key fi a 8e4 44 esse Red EC esea doe doped ss 12 Ignition Key Removal lessen 12 Ill minated Entty esci RE ts 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key 0 0 14 Infant Restraint vestras entas t anuna NA 71 72 Inflation Pressure Tires llle 347 Inf
171. ch the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton Ah withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC whe
172. chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e For security power window operation and sunroof or Sky Slider operation if equipped is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 DOOR LOCKS If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door Manual Door Locks the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the To lock each door pu
173. cle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be obtained imme diately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam Cooling System age T WARNING e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition NING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in e You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant motion or steam from your radiator If
174. cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure Continued accidentally or may not function properly if modi fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso ries may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili ties contact your authorized dealer Continued 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued e Do not place or hang any items such as add on video players on the front passenger seatback The additional weight may cause the Occupant Classi fication System to be unable to classify the front seat passenger correctly This could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for your protection in an impact The airbag system is designed to be main
175. conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING Continued A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Continued e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your
176. conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with 9 474 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M the ownership e
177. coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Selection of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than This vehicle has not been designed for use with specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an impro
178. cording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language German e Language Dutch e Language Italian e Language English Language French Language Spanish Tutorial e Voice Training ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 SEATS Manual Front Seat Adjustments The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat near the floor NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the VR button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recogni tion 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by uconnect phone For best results the
179. ctly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Dry with a soft cloth Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 Cav Car Mini Description Cav Car Mini Description ity tridge Fuse ity tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse A J8 40 Amp
180. cupant is classified by the OCS Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occu pant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door or instrument panel the weight sensors in the seat may not properly classify the occupant Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improperly classified Ensure that the front passenger seatback does not touch anything placed on the back seat because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down the rear seat check to be sure it doesn t touch the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized dealer If there is a fault present in the OCS the Airbag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is a fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system If there is a fault present in
181. d Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 SET Button To S
182. d by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console Power Sunroof Switch 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Never leave unattended children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sun
183. d cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of t
184. d closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 NOTE Manual Operation e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime This system offers a full complement of manual override without affecting automatic operation features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details Automatic Tem
185. d is approved for highway use EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 means the 3rd week 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 342 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG ME Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Tire and Loading Information Placard Va SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FR Tut 1 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS A NEVER EXCEED XXX K 2 TIRE ORIGINAL TIRE SE P195 70R14 T125 70015 a COLD TIR INFLATION PRE 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI 420k
186. d may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the road way or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE ERM is disabled anytime the ESP is in Full Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP for a complete explanation of the available ESP modes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 the engine power will be reduced and you will feel the WARNINGI brake being applied to individual wheels in an attempt to Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi stop the trailer from swaying tione ana driving CORTIHORS UN the eue NOTE The TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in that wheel lift or rollover may occur Electronic Ro ihe Pastial Off mode and Pull Ot mode Mitigation ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or WARNING rollovers especially those that involve leaving the e Trailer Sway Control TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommenda tions Refer to Vehicle Loading and Trailer roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must
187. d weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in this section 382 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper brea
188. d will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required 456 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MM e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake CAUTION master cylinder and transmission and add as needed Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change Required Maintenance Intervals D Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following e Change the engine oil filter pages for the required maintenance intervals e Inspect the brake hoses and lines M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a mi Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of th
189. de The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 For uconnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to aconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect
190. de the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Seat Belt Pretensioner If Equipped The front passenger seat belt is equipped with a preten sioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioner is triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Like the front airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s or front passenger s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occu
191. ditional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 e Per 2 e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the screw from the RKE transmitter case if equipped 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 2 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade tool to pry the two halves of the RKE transmit ter case apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 7 Separating Case Halves 81182c72 3 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together 5 Reinstall and tighten the screw until snug if equipped General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation ee THING
192. drive on hoist should be used instead of a chassis hoist 3 7L Only 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Be sure to follow the dusty or off road condi tions maintenance interval if applicable WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 W
193. e Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The uconnect phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 To activate the uconnect phone from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone
194. e REVERSE position and the Rear Park Assist System is turned off a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle and the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED e The Rear Park Assist System when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone If a Rear Park Assist System malfunction occurs a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYS TEM and the LED in the Rear Park Assist switch will illuminate If this occurs see your authorized dealer for service CAUTION e The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle in cluding small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Ob stacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity Continued 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION Continued WARNING e The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the e Drivers must be careful when backing up even Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using the Rear Park Assist System Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise y
195. e cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger To 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se accomplish this the system gathers information from the cabin infrared sensor mounted between the sun visors and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle The controls on the climate control provide the system with operator input Other sensors take account of ve hicle speed A C pressure outside temperature and engine cooling temperature Using all of these inputs the system automatically adjusts airflow temperature air flow distribution airflow volume and the amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dialin the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will main tain that level automatically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O Off position on the blower control stops the system completely an
196. e compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for
197. e following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 457 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 458 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MM 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary L LJ 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule l
198. e front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint Continued 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued e A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards The manufacturer also recommends that you try a c
199. e headlight housing to access the bulb with rubbing alcohol headlight bulb lock ring 3 Firmly grasp the lock ring and rotate it counterclock 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the wise to unlock it headlight housing and rotate the lock ring clockwise to 4 Remove the bulb and connector assembly from the M headlight housing 7 Close the hood 5 Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and then connect the replacement bulb 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Turn Signal and Front Side Marker Lights 1 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right to access the left front turn signal or side marker Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left to access the right front turn signal or side marker 2 Remove three push pins from the wheel well liner 3 Gently flex the wheel well liner forward to access the bulb 4 Rotate the bulb s socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing 5 Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace ment bulb 6 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place 7 Reposition the wheel well liner and install the push pins Front Fog Light 1 Open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlight housing to access the bulb 3 Rotate the bulb s socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the fog light housing 4 Pull the bul
200. e mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on driver s door trim panel Power Mirror Switch Models with Express Window Feature Press and release the mirror select button marked L left or R right and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing The selection will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position following an adjustment NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the instrument panel to return the power mirrors to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for details Models without Express Window Feature Press the mirror select button marked L or R and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in this section for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing t
201. e new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 After you enter the name the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook en
202. e oe a SE eae A 435 Paint Damage sasa gta ridit iia 435 Panic Alarin 242i a earn dn ee nae 24 Park Sense System Rear 000 158 Parking Brake see pne ho e ga RS 320 Parking On Hill 22r RR Re 320 Passing Light 5 ia sudes dere tray ae UR ene 147 Personal Settings i odis ed b hd hesi nags 223 lu A CMT a os E r A 80 Pets Transporting 2 32 2324 e ren 80 Phone Cellular nnn nt irae 94 Phone Hands Free uconnect 94 Placard Tire and Loading Information 342 Polishing and Waxing o eseas esateu run Cneas 436 Power Door Loeks 3 4 4 sb cae eee hee n Eni C 30 Inverter sc oad eae a e BRE 3 EO 182 MITOS uus erg eu RESERVE ie as 92 Seals ty ik va ER ERR RR RE RE 130 TEM 494 INDEX ae DIETING ugue eR oe xe as 318 319 SunrO OL siya gea d eR rp d eR Raga 171 Sunroof Sky Slider 174 433 Windows i us Peek RR Re Pepe 35 Power Steering Fluid lesus 452 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 52 Preparation for Jacking 04 397 Pretensioners Seat BENSI zoo sit Bien ect dae EE tes etna 49 Programmable Electronic Features 223 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry ssec prestie cse prmiress 20 Radial Ply Tires seseris etana Rma 349 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 426 Radio Remote Controls n nnana aaa 271 Radio Satellite uconnect studios 266 Rain Sensitive
203. e only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multis
204. e system automatically switches to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system will return to Full Off mode The ESP TCS Indicator Light is always illuminated when ESP is off To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF button This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE e Full Off is the only operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW range The ESP system will be in this mode whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the transfer case is shifted into 4WD LOW range e The ESP OFF message will display and a chime will sound when the shift lever is moved from any position to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was cleared previously WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability Full Off mode is only intended for off highway or off road use ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is com ESP bined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both turn off with the e
205. e that both latches engage e Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Exterior and Interior Lighting Control xy The multifunction lever on the left side of the y steering column controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signal lights in strument panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights if equipped 4 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Headlights and Parking Lights Automatic Headlights If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent This system automatically turns the headlights on or off for parking light operation Turn the end of the lever to according to ambient light levels To turn the system on the second detent for headlight operation turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO uu usce iu o UIT TI position third detent When the system is on the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To turn the Automatic System off turn the end of the multifunction lever out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on i
206. e the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdo men Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together low as possible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Removing Slack From Belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cu
207. e vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas e You can also turn the Temperature Control to maxi mum heat the Mode Control to floor and the Fan Control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME J ack Location Spare Tire Stowage The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the in the cargo compartment behind a trim cover on the left vehicle and is held in place by a cable winch mechanism rear trim panel The latch is located at the bottom of the Spare Tire Removal trim cover Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut located in the rear cargo area inside the vehicle Use the lug wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle Jack Storage Location BARS I 060507100 Lowering Raising Spare Tire
208. ead and the road This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking ability and control e After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESP This system includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Electronic Stability Program ESP These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Two additional electronic brake control system options are Hill Descent Control HDC and Trailer Sway Control TSC Your vehicle may be equipped with one or both of these options Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve hicle
209. ean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR Total Clean and if necessary follow with MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils
210. eaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Adding Washer Fluid The windshield and rear window washers share the same fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 Exh
211. ease in engine RPM before the Electronic Speed Control disengages is normal To Resume Speed If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever up and release Resume Accel and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the peda
212. eavy scrubbing e Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Allow the top to dry before opening Vacuuming the top with a wet dry shop vacuum will decrease the tops drying time ensure removal of all dirt and delete streaks in the material Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stub born stains If stains persist contact your local autho rized dealership for further suggestions CAUTION Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches Cleaners should not contain silicones organic sol vents petroleum distillates or plasticizers Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before opening it Additional Cleaning Procedure For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn stains apply MOPAR Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner to the complete stain extending 2 in 50 mm beyond the stain With a soft bristle brush scrub in all directions over the stain Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the area with warm water If the stain is still apparent repeat the cleaning procedure When the stain is no longer showing rinse the complete top with warm water Let the top dry before opening it Protection For appearance purposes you may wish to protect the acrylic cloth top periodically A fabric protectant such as Scotchguard is suggested The top should be clean and dry before applic
213. ecifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negat
214. econd time The Cruise indicator lamp will turn off Be sure to turn the Electronic Speed Control system off when not in use NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system will auto matically turn off when the engine is turned off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press down on the SET DECEL lever and release Release the accel erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph 40 km h for the Electronic Speed Control to set e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET DECEL lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you cancel or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deacti vate the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory NOTE For vehicles equipped with a manual transmis sion pressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed control A slight incr
215. ect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO
216. ection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe collisions The Side Curtain Airbag will also 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee trigger on the crash side of the vehicle in moderate to severe side collisions or on both sides of the vehicle in rollover collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be triggered However even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has particularly if the Occupant Classification System has determined the pas senger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in a category other than that of an adult refer to information on Occupant Classification System in this section This could be a child teenager or even a small size adult Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt prop
217. ed after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant
218. ed on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se WARNING Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sust
219. eel Drive Models The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL for recreational towing The NEUTRAL selection button is located at the top of the 4WD Control Switch Shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL can take place with the selector switch in any mode position CAUTION e The transmission must be in PARK position for recreational towing Failure to follow these proce dures can cause severe transmission and or trans fer case damage Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Continued 390 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued e Before recreational towing perform the procedure outlined under Shifting into NEUTRAL to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL Otherwise internal damage will result e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged Shifting into NEUTRAL Perform the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing Bring the vehicle to a complete stop Turn OFF the engine Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Press the brake pedal Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL You or others could be injured if you leave the 6 Use the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object to vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the press the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for NEUTRAL position wit
220. eft and right controls are rocker type switches with a pushbutton in the center of each switch Reach behind the steering wheel to access the switches Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel 045003761 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Right Hand Switch Functions e Press the top of the switch to increase the volume e Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume e Press the button in the center of the switch to change modes i e AM FM etc Left Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation e Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting e Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting e Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to the next preset that you have programmed Left Hand Switch Functions for Media i e CD Operation e Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next track e Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play e Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the second track three times to listen to the third track and so forth e Press the button located in the center of the switch to change to the next preset that you have programmed en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANE
221. egularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu Special Care lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug If i ji if i and Tar Remover Ase ise e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film a month stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never It is i hat th in holes in the lower edges to scratch the paint e It is important that the drain holes in wer edge of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing clear and open niga SESS gloss or thim out the PARE ug If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is CAUTION considered the responsibility of the owner e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can
222. elease the switch again to turn off the power outlet The status indicator will also turn off 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CUPHOLDERS The rear passengers have cupholders at the rear of the There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers center console located in the center console Rear Cupholders Front Cupholders ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 STORAGE Console Storage Compartment To open press the latch and lift the cover Front Storage Compartment The front storage compartment located on the left side of the instrument panel can hold cell phones PDAs and other small items Center Console Front Storage Compartment 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME The center console has a removable storage tray which Removable Storage Tray CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Load Floor The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 Ibs 181 kg The load floor has a built in storage bin that can hold a variety of items The underside of the storage bin cover also contains a plastic lined tray The cover can be installed with either side facing up for added utility To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room Refer to Seats in this Section for additional information on the 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat feature Acce
223. ellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button When Equipped Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the song title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or cou
224. elts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having fixed lower attachments or flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out board seating positions only The center seating position will accommodate LATCH compatible lower anchorages with flexible webbing mounted attachments only Re gardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System and In stalling Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt in this section for ty
225. emi mrau ee Rares Re ae ee eles 358 Tire Pressure fic cide eae mrs 346 Premium System If Equipped 361 Tire Inflation Pressures 347 General Information 365 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 349 W Fuel Requirements Radial Ply Tires 349 Reformulated Gasoline Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 350 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Tire Spilitung usse ed tows eR Yu 351 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 367 Tread Wear Indicators 0 351 MMT In Gasoline sees 367 Life Of Tire 2 osse se RR RR en 352 Materials Added To Fuel 368 Replacement Tires 0000 352 Fuel System Cautions 368 aile Chains eec netos E ca 353 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 369 Bl Tire Rotation Recommendations 355 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME la Adding Puel 2 29 ze yr RS Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message li Vehicle Loading Certification Label a Trailer Towing sois cr y REESE ads Common Towing Definitions Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings Trailer And Tongue Weight 382 Towing Requirements sesira cereis anar 383 Towing ViPS eben 388 ll Recreational Towing
226. er in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Continued WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Continued 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued e Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit b
227. er is dry before opening Always close the Sky Slider when leaving your vehicle damage to the vehicle interior can occur Do not leave the Sky Slider open for several weeks at a time Close it occasionally to prevent discoloration in the folds of the fabric and to allow the creases to smooth out This is especially im portant if the Sky Slider was opened when not completely dry 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SSS WARNING WARNING Continued Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries If potential danger exists while opening or closing that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you e In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with the Sky Slider open Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Before operating the Sky Slider make sure that no moving parts of the Sky Slider can injure a person or animal Never place any extremities hands feet etc near the Sky Slider components or the roof area while operating the Sky Slider Continued the Sky Slider in Automatic Mode press and release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation If potential danger exists while opening or closing the Sky Slider in Operator Mode release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation Do not allow small children to operate the Sky Slider Never leave children
228. er con trol lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Headlights with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center in Section 4 of this manual Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver This feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer control lever to one of the five intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the windshield wiper washer control lever Wiper delay position 1
229. erly should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older chil dren who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arms en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint refer to information on Child Restraint in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear yo
230. erminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The uconnect phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the uconnect phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1
231. especially with a loaded vehicle Use on Rear Wheels only Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower sug gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacturer STARTING AND OPERATING 355 These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS SS CC Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling C and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns E The suggested rotation method is the forward cross Saee 5 shown in the following diagram 055703771 Tire Rotation These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 356 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the proper maintenance intervals Remember more frequent rotation is permissible if desired Also correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear
232. ess and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On or Off appears Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers If Equipped When on is selected the system will automatically acti vate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On or Off appears When Off is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On or Off appears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Easy Entry Exit Seat under Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more information Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When on is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until On or Off appears Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights
233. ession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 p
234. essory plug into the outlet for use to ensure proper operation NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw e After the use of high power draw accessories or power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Continued 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
235. et the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not mat
236. ether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint For the outboard seating positions route the tether underneath the head rest and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a ci
237. ew through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A 030407085 Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your insid
238. excessive heating of the rear brakes The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing WARNING e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The ABS conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph to slow down or stop 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase movement The movement can be more apparent on ice braking or steering efficiency beyond that af and snow This is normal forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The ABS pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS s
239. ey is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors liftgate and liftgate flip up window for unauthorized entry and ignition for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will sound the horn intermittently flash the head lights and taillights and flash the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming of the System If something triggers the Vehicle Security Alarm and n
240. f snow that prevents the rear wiper blade from returning to the park position If the rear wiper control is turned off and the blade cannot return to the park position dam age to the rear wiper motor may occur CAUTION e Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the rear wiper may result if the rear wiper control is left in the on position Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window Continued 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Continued
241. fety Tips sss se x3 E neii 81 FIBGIGE THOME eai i ee Transporting Passengers 05 81 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These either side up numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the key to the ACC position and then push the key and cylinder inward slightly and rotate the key to the LOCK position Then remove the key 020207279 Vehicle Key 020205845 Ignition Switch Positions 1 Lock 3 On 2 Acc 4 Start NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC features such as the power window switches radio power sunroof or Sky Slider THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC features such as the power window switches radio power sunroof or Sky Slider if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after
242. fety or the safety of others 334 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Depending upon model and mode of operation the ESP system has up to three operating modes ESP On Partial Off and Full Off ESP On Two Wheel Drive Vehicles and Four Wheel Drive Vehicles in 2WD and 4WD High Range This is the normal operating mode for ESP when operat ing a two wheel drive vehicle It is also the normal mode for operating a four wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or 4WD HIGH range The ESP system will be in ESP On mode whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted out of 4WD LOW range This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or Full Off for specific reasons as noted Refer to Partial Off and to Full Off for additional information Partial Off Two Wheel Drive Vehicles and Four Wheel Drive Vehicles in 2WD and 4WD High Range The Partial Off mode is intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode raises the threshold for TCS and ESP activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows The ESP OFF button is located in the lower switch bank below the climate control To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily depress the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will turn
243. ff the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS 12 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer 13 Oil Pressure Warning Light EA This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 14 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System amp e3 ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the b
244. following buttons mounted on the steering wheel mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System MENU Status Personal Settings Press and release the MENU button and the Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings SCROLL Customer Programmable Features Button QU Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERA TURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection FUNCTION SELECT Button Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Memory 1 2 Profile Set Memory 1 2 Profile Recall Memory System Disabled Vehicle Not in Park with a single chime automatic transmission Memory System Disabled Vehicle in Motion with a mn single chime manual transmission Memory System Disabled Seat Belt Buckled with a single chime Personal Settings No
245. from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter m Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to ret
246. g the button proceed with Program ming Homelink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approve
247. gers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle 022205927 Liftgate Release en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING Liftgate Flipper Glass The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the liftgate is unlocked To open the flipper glass push up on the window switch located on the liftgate 022207207 Liftgate Flipper Glass Release To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass may automatically rise NOTE If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should occur an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the liftgate trim panel WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer injuries including fatalities if you are not properly OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to
248. git Character Display News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release tha
249. gram while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button 1
250. h as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Continued 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ge WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly To Lower the Rear Seat 1 Locate the release strap on the lower outboard side of each rear seatback 2 Pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle Rear Seat Release Strap 3 Fold the rear seat completely forward 4 If desired push down on the seatback to lock it in the folded position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 To Raise the Rear Seat NOTE If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position 1 If locked in the folded position pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle 2 Raise the seatback and lock it into place WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly
251. hange indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following proce dure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 28 Cruise Indicator If Equipped CRUISE Tris indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on 29 Shift Lever Indicator This display indicator shows automatic transmission shift lever selection 30 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for several seconds after the A ignition is turned ON as a reminder to buckle up This light will remain on as long as the seat belt remains unbuckled 31 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application
252. he mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 030407295 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down the sun visor 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM 2 Unclip the visor from the center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated uconnect phone Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for uconnect phone operating instruc tions for these radios Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate uconnect phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system uconnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone NOTE The uconnect phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the uconnect website for s
253. he cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Cargo Light its aaa hee el ee ead Vers TL212 2 Overhead Console Light PLW214 2A Reading Light 0 WL212 2 LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Headlight 9008 H13 Front Park Turn Signal Light 3757AK Front Side Marker Light 168 Back Up Light 0000 3157K Center High Mounted Stop Light GEIMSL J i sra tore buta LED serviced at an authorized dealer Fog Light 0 200 000 eae H10 9145 License Plate Light 0 168 Rear Tail Stop 000000 3157K Rear Turn Signal Light 3757AK ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 BULB REPLACEMENT CAUTION Headlight Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil 1 Open the hood contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the 2 Reach behind th
254. he steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer No chemical flushes should be used in any power steering system only the approved lubricant may be used WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ME PARKING BRAKE To set the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON the Brake Warning Light in the instru ment cluster will light To release the parking brake pull up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely NOTE The Brake Warning Light indicates only that the parking brake is applied You m
255. her 4 m roe 291 Emergency Jump Starting 402 Engine Block Heater 293 Engine Fails to Start 0 05 292 Remote i24 224204 942 Br A oed 27 Starting and Operating 00 291 Starting Procedures iiis 291 Steering Power isses bid we eR denied 318 319 Tilt Column 2x ty ew gal eee eal 154 Wheel Tilt eee ERR REY 154 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls wx aaa seek RS P EXER BERG OR Y eg gp 271 Storage is eae cer a s We RESET CIPIT 185 Storage Din sid ciues dore Red ea d 185 Storage Vehicle sog em RR 283 Sun ROO 0x3 ed pee RU Rae RUP 171 Sun Roof Sky Slider Power 174 433 Sun Visor Extension 0000 eee eee 93 Sunroof Maintenance llle 174 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 53 Sway Control Trailer eese 327 Synthetic Engine Oil ps sisi eer 5304504 415 System Remote Starting llle 27 Tachometer llle 207 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 277 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 209 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 498 INDEX MM Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 6 6 2 eee 188 Tilt Steering Column 0 05 154 Time Delay Headlight 144 Nip Start esce toed ese seaside dane cowie 291 Tire and Loading Information Placard
256. hild restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat b
257. hone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the uconnect phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say
258. hout first fully engaging the our seconds After the shift is complete and the NEU parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position TRAL light turns on release the NEUTRAL button disengages both the front driveshaft and rear drive shaft from the powertrain and it will allow the 7 Start the engine vehicle to move despite the transmission position 8 Shift the transmission into REVERSE The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 9 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement a A C N e WARNING ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 10 Repeat Steps 8 and 9 with the transmission in DRIVE 11 Turn OFF the engine 12 Turn the ignition switch to the unlocked OFF posi tion 13 Shift the transmission into PARK 14 Attach the vehicle to a tow vehicle with a tow bar 15 Disconnect the battery negative cable NOTE Steps 1 through 5 are requirements for shifting the transfer case If these requirements are not met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL selection button or while the shift attempt is in process then the NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until all require ments are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no
259. ia supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recogni
260. ibuting Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 WARNING e An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability brak ing performance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat ible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec reational Vehicle dealer for additional information mm 057005576 Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect 378 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 057005577 057005578 With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect
261. ic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 6 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of tr an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on thro
262. icable with the available cellular service If you need towing assistance and area e Press the PHONE button to begin If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Emergency e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 WARNING 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico e The uconnect phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the uconnect phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automa
263. il will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 455 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level groun
264. ing If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed k
265. intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over steer or under steer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator ESP TCS Indicator Light The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the e tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s sa
266. investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee the U S government and various states Data of a poten tially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product 3
267. io are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recogniz
268. ion e Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some e When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the uconnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and uconnect phone Local E name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the uconnect phone e Echo at the far end can sometimes
269. ipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Use this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as iden tified by the symbols on the control or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode e Panel gt Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlet
270. is feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely Using the PANIC Alarm NOTE The PANIC and Security Alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the PANIC and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it To turn the PANIC Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the PANIC Alarm is on the headlights and turn signal lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the illuminated entry system will turn on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 The PANIC Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater During the PANIC Mode the door locks and Remote Keyless Entry RKE system will function normally PANIC mode will not disarm the Security System on vehicles so equipped NOTE You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the PANIC Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Ad
271. is manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully AQ WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See Owner s Manual For Further Information 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe
272. is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive Choose position 3 for normal rain conditions Choose position 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity Choose position 4 or 5 if you desire more sensitivity Place the lever in the off position when not using the system NOTE e The rain sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position e The rain sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance The rain sensing feature can be turned on and off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual The rain sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is first switched ON the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32 F 0 C If the wiper control is moved the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperature rises above freezing the rain sensing feature will then op erate
273. ither front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped On some models the driver s power window switch has an Auto Up feature Pull the window switch up to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way pull the window switch up to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door
274. itute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Continued 298 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Tow ing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual DRIVE This range is used for most city and highway driving 2 Second This range is used for moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow Begins at a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to 2nd gear Will not shift to 3rd ge
275. ive effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content 368 STARTING AND OPERATING ME of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contai
276. jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper locations 402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M J UMP STARTING WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan WARNING Continued e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contami Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so nated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 Volts 1 Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an unin tended electrical contact
277. k in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam age your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that is will not shift during travel When traile ring cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen sion chassis structure or tires 384 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG ME Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels
278. knowledge the lock signal Sound Horn with Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed i e func tional RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Flash Lights with Lock The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit
279. l Lever 142 New Vehicle Break In Period 80 Occupant Restraints siss scis o d ess 42 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 365 451 Odometer TEP asc yea et hehe a Cane d eo 210 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 314 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 314 Oil Change Indicator 212 218 Oil Change Indicator Reset 212 218 Oll Engine 22 62 ek eae we oe ee eds 413 451 Capacity stands Ga yas wai den a iat 450 Change Interval 212 218 414 Checking 2 0 0 4 a m eR RR 413 en INDEX 493 Dips ck siise s Sle ale Bee tap eee oes 413 Disposal ies uersa HORA See P do 415 Filter P MM 415 451 Filter Disposal secie eee pistoiese s 415 Identification Logo llle 414 Materials Added to ss ss escasa s tmas esw 415 Recommendation 414 450 Synthetic esp bedded ee RES iess 415 VISCOSITY eseki hae sasi cS BA as 415 450 Oil Filter Changes sek sree esus ai eee s 415 Onboard Diagnostic System 410 411 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 165 Operating Precautions 00000 410 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Outside Rearview Mirrors 206 91 Overdrive z222seeraedu 8 eu eae ex 213 299 Overdrive OFF Switch 00 299 Overheating Engine pae 209 394 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 475 Paint Care iue Saves na WS ea
280. l drive provides improved trac tion there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road con ditions permit You or others could be injured Shift Positions The electronic transfer case switch is located on the center console next to the gear selector lever 81c357ca 4WD Control Switch 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD Auto Four Wheel Drive Auto High Range This active on demand range makes available optimum traction for a en STARTING AND OPERATING 311 wide range of conditions while maximizing driver con venience This position is always in four wheel drive mode with a normal 42 front axle 58 rear axle torque split The system also anticipates and prevents slip by redirecting torque as necessary up to 100 to the front or rear axle if needed 4WD Low Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range is for low speed four wheel drive Locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in this section for more information T
281. l handle downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lock the steering column in position pull the control handle upward until it is fully engaged ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The tilt adjustment must be locked while driving Adjust ing the steering wheel while driving or driving without the tilt adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 81bc4c2c 40 km h Electronic Speed Control Lever The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec side of the steering wheel tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button located O on the end of the Electronic Speed Control lever The Cruise indicator lamp in the instru ment cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push and release the ON OFF button a s
282. l is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist System is a driver aid that senses for obstacles behind the vehicle and provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the Rear Park Assist System operating prop erly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the Rear Park Assist System When you turn off the Rear Park Assist System the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DIS ABLED Furthermore once you turn off the Rear Park Assist System it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to th
283. layer or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in this section 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM uconnect studios SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius
284. ld restraint tether strap Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether underneath the headrest and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat Tether Strap Mounting 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy
285. le CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play But
286. ll turn off in the normal manner The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Delay Turning Headlights Off Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime Running Lights DRL and operate at DRL lower inten sity whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the shift lever is in any position except PARK ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will turn off automatically when the turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned to the LOCK position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on the end of the multifunction lever 031406006 Front Fog Light Control NOTE The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights 146 UNDERSTANDING THE F
287. lt your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
288. luid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule l Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 465 OCOC OC O C O C O oo 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Replace accessory drive belt s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler De
289. m is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection E e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite th
290. meet capacity than what was originally equipped on SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain could result in tire overloading and failure You manufacturer In addition only install tire chains on could lose control and have an accident P225 75R16 or smaller tires Continued CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings 354 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG Se CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe the following precautions e Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with tires other than P225 75R16 or smaller tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle e Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Continued CAUTION Continued e Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps
291. n it is open from the front of the vehicle Anti Pinch Protect Feature The Sky Slider will retract automatically if it detects an obstruction while closing If this occurs remove the obstruction and use the switch again to close the Sky Slider WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the Sky Slider is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the Sky Slider before closing Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the Sky Slider in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the Sky Slider open adjust the Sky Slider opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sky Slider Maintenance Refer to Sky Slider Top Care under Maintaining Your Vehicle in Section 7 of this manual 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET Your vehicle is equipped with a fused 12 Volt DC power outlet This power outlet is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls It has power available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position Front Power Outlet Insert the cigar lighter or acc
292. n may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The uconnect phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the uconnect website for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any uconnect phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The uconnect phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most uconnect phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phon
293. n order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation STARTING AND OPERATING 365 The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 2 2 ee KR55120123 Canada sees pe bg ces eed 2671 5120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800dfab line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such 366 STARTING AND OPERATING Se as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline sp
294. n the Automatic mode Headlights with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only cu D UNES When this feature is active the headlights will turn on Headlight Switch approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 Headlight Time Delay If Equipped This feature is particularly useful when exiting your vehicle in an unlit area It provides the safety of headlight illumination for about 90 seconds after turning the igni tion switch to the LOCK position To activate the delay turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when you turn off the headlights Only the headlights will illuminate during this time If you turn the headlights or parking lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they wi
295. n the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording med
296. n tire wear low tire pressure or excessive loading 4WD Lock to 4WD Low When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or its occupants ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h using the Preferred Procedure or completely stopped using the Alternate Procedure Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine RUNNING slow the vehicle speed to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine OFF or RUNNING shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is on not flashing shift the transmission into gear NOTE Steps 1 and 2 in the Preferred Procedure and the Alternate Procedure are requirements for shifting the transfer case If these requirements are not met prior to attempting the shift or while the shift attempt is in process then the indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry a shift move the
297. nching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt However any seat belt system may loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has an automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough slack to allow you to pass the belt through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the RELEASE button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a chi
298. nd call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VOICE RECOG NITION button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be t
299. ne eighth tank 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfuncti
300. nes send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no uconnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again redial 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION VR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition VR System Operation e This Voice Recognition system allows you to control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an
301. ng jump start 404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 7 If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi lizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START position 8 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 9 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent Continued WARNING Continued e Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion e Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use of safety chains is recom mended Attach towing device to main structural mem bers of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405 TOWING METHODS NOTE When towing a 4x4 model the transfer case must be in NEUTRAL and the transmission must be in PARK Front Wheels Rear Wheels Raised ground Model Flat Towing all four Flatbed Towing wheels ON the Recommended Raised
302. ngine STARTING AND OPERATING 337 running If the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION turns on continuously with the engine running a mal function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Tire Markings e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously 054903773 1 US DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking dards Code TIN n i MA 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds 3 Service Description 6 Ticadwear Traction dnd will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the Temperature Grades maneuver that caused the ESP activation 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on Eur
303. ns uconnect phone If Equipped Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped ll Remote Sound System Controls It Equipped s usu ord a d aj e eee Right Hand Switch Functions Left Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation 4 2 cca cioe a eae e ea ss Left Hand Switch Functions For Media ie CD Operation 00004 B CD DVD Maintenance Bl Climate Controls Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System cues a eine mee iate y a ae epus Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped Operating Tips 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040106636 1 Air Outlet 4 Radio 7 Power Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 5 Glove Compartment 8 Lower Switch Bank 3 Storage Tray 6 Climate Control 9 Storage Bin if equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER e er A depu NA US 4 vel 81bb510e 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL x INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Fuel Door Reminder This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle m where the fuel cap is located 3 Low Fuel Light This indicator lights when the fuel level drops to approximately o
304. ns MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Use the following guidelines to maintain your vehi cle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intention
305. ns or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible 318 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG ME WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as nece
306. nshift from OVERDRIVE to DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h NOTE e Ifthe vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures the transmission may not shift into OVERDRIVE and 300 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG ME When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL button This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift to 3rd gear NOTE TOW HAUL mode locks out Overdrive Tow Haul Button The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Transmission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in second gear in any forward driving range To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF
307. nterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is made you can seek up or down or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the Music Type screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set
308. o cated on the gearshift bezel TOW 19 4WD Indicator Vehicles Equipped with Command Trac This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in AWD the four wheel drive mode In this mode the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft are me chanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 20 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Indicator Light If Equipped The malfunction indicator for the Electronic Stability Program ESP is combined with the Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after the several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sound will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following a maneuver that caused the ESP activation 21 SERV Service 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped The SERV 4WD
309. o action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm the System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle 2 Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door LOCK switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NOTE The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers or the driver s door lock cylinder 3 Close all doors The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period opening any door or the liftgate will ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 cancel the arming process If the Vehicle Security Alarm arms successfully the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set NOTE For added security whenever the Security Alarm is armed the HomeLink Garage Door Opener if equipped is disabled as well To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plung ers or the driver s door lock cylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Sec
310. o main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do n
311. ocal laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position Inserting Ignition Key 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door NOTE When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the child lock 1 WARNING control and rotate it to the UNLOCK position Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock Inserting Ignition Key 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door NOTE After disengaging the Child Protection Door 1 O
312. odel Frontal Area Max GTW Tongue Wt See Note Transmission Gross Trailer Wt 3 7L Automatic 4x2 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 lbs 91 kg 3 7L Automatic 4x4 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 lbs 91 kg 3 7L Automatic 4x2 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg w Cooler 3 7L Automatic 4x4 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg w Cooler Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in this section ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 When Towing Trailers with Gross Trailer Weight GTW between 3 500 Lbs 1 588 kg and 5 000 Lbs 2 268 kg The following chart provides maximum trailer weight ratings towable for the following engine transmission combinations ONLY if using a weight distributing hitch Engine Model Frontal Area Max GTW Tongue Wt See Note Transmission Gross Trailer Wt 3 7L Automatic 4x2 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 lbs 227 kg w Cooler 3 7L Automatic 4x4 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 lbs 227 kg w Cooler Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combine
313. off This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 ESP Off Button NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF button Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF button This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Full Off Four Wheel Drive Vehicles in 4WD High and 4WD Low Range The Full Off mode is intended for off highway and off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions The ESP OFF button is located in the lower switch bank m below the climate control panel To enter Full Off mode depress and hold the ESP OFF button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and an ESP OFF message will appear in the odometer Press and release the trip odom eter button located on the instrument cluster to turn off this message 336 STARTING AND OPERATING Se In this mode ESP and TCS are turned off except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km k At speeds over 40 mph 64 km k th
314. oice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook Cleared Enter Number New Entry Added B1c6bf80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Voice Tree Setup Confirmation i Confirmation Prompts on off Say 4 digit System Lists pin code Phones Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing New phone Select a language will English Espanol temporarily or Francais override phone priorities Towing Assistance Sclect phone to be deleted Phone Deleted List Phones System Lists Phones System confirms All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location all home help ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list pho
315. oil filter Service Schedule 11 Rotate tires J Change the engine oil and engine oil 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine off road or frequent trailer towing Adjust parking brake on vehicles Inspect the CV joints equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect exhaust system Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter oc O C C L L 0 O C M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 468 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MM t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competen
316. olders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nmm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension mm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144
317. ombined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 892 kg Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ibs Occupant 3 160 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 865 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 345 346 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Safety WARNING e Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in ti
318. on Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play E AM FM CD DVD Radio RER REN If Equipped i ci ea cns satut antes p ER ered x Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure lll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack e pcs sasi saa Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode Bl Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Bl uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU Radios Only 3 285 sada qe eR Ros eek pii System Activation 253 en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode Satellite Antenna 000008 Reception Quality Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode Operating Instructio
319. on manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury 330 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG ME Disabling and Enabling HSA This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC refer to Hill Start Assist under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Apply the parking brake 4 Start the engine 5 Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left 6 Press the ESP OFF button located in the lower switch bank below the climate control four times within twenty seconds The ESP TCS Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 7 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional one half turn to the right 8 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
320. on 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service Le vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the Floor Mix or Defrost mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such a
321. on indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 Electron
322. onder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional
323. op At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be turned on or off through the programmable features in the EVIC For details refer to Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel Hood Release 2 Outside of the vehicle locate the safety latch lever between the grille and hood opening left of center when facing hood Push the safety latch lever to the right and then raise the hood 031307179 Underhood Safety Latch Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the underside of the hood UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Hood Prop Rod Hole Location 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION To prevent possible damage e Before closing hood make sure the hood prop rod is fully seated into its storage retaining clips e Do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensur
324. opean design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT es STARTING AND OPERATING 339 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagon
325. or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two INTRODUCTION 5 million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION A qo Xt De AY e o5 E ELECTRONIC STABILITY RAM BRAKE WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULE HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS a ELECTRONIC WPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM l1 CS XX z N a KB ORO M 2D e 23 ax e 0 20 FUEL REAR WINDOW WaNDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING Low BEAM POWER OUTRE UPPER AND LOWER BEAT WINDOW LIFT i E HILL DESCENT es INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET CONTROL BRAKE BOC 7 Dart Qe mo FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WONOSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT FRONT FOQ LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTLLOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM Ei 3 2002 QE C s amp V awo erae WINDSHIELD EL
326. oring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPMS Telltale Light will remain on and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h i
327. ormation Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 81826bed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 81826bd7 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYS TEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur
328. ormation Center Vehicle ls 215 Inside Rearview Mirror lesen 90 Instrument Cluster lesen 201 202 Instrument Panel and Controls 200 en INDEX 489 Instrument Panel Cover 000 438 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 439 Integrated Power Module Fuses 440 Interior Appearance Care 00 06 438 Interior Lighting 000 142 147 Interior Lights iere cioe ek ees 148 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 150 Introduction 3 6366 ede m ed Ree Fae 4 Inverter Power rri 20 0 000 ee 182 Jack Locations cue ju Dg e dede Me Rw Seas 396 Jack Operation 0 000000 00000 395 398 Jacking Instructions 398 Jump Startins use ra Wa eae Ga 402 Key Programming trapte papae 16 Key Replacement 0 000000 ee eee 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 0 14 Key In Reminder 0000000 14 Keyless Entry System llle 20 Keys acai aa Sos a wees Pare det ea ak Gace dede 12 Lane Change and Turn Signals 146 Lap Shoulder Belts 000004 43 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 74 76 Latches 2446 deas e dme RR o ees 83 Hood iex de REPRE RACE e 140 Lead Free Gasoline llle 365 Leaks Fluid ee 83 Life of Tites ssas ke o ek pinaasa 352 Liftgate secos be ee ER 40 Liftgate Flipper Glass na yea eea a a
329. ot store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant anti freeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engin
330. ou could damage the sensors when using the Rear Park Assist System Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots be fore backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surround ings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING Continued Enabling and Disabling the System There are times when you may want to disable the Rear Before using the Rear Park Assist System it is Park Assist System such as when towing a trailer strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve Vehicles Equipped With the Electronic Vehicle hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Information Center EVIC EN Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off through the EVIC For details refer to Personal Settings much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia Customer Programmable Features under Electronic when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and manual hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle vehicles or obstacle
331. ould be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Lumbar Support If Equipped This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support The control lever is on the inboard side of the seat Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped This feature allows the front passenger seat to fold flat for extended cargo space Some fold flat seats also have a hardback surface that you can use as a work surface when the seat is folded flat Pull up on the lever to fold down the seatback Fold Flat Passenger Seat 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Power Seat If Equipped to tilt the seat For vehicles equipped with a power The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat passenger seat use this switch to move the seat forward near the floor and rearward CAUTION Do not place any article under any seat as it may cause damage to the seat or seat controls WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might no
332. ous operation then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual TOW HAUL To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing press the TOW HAUL button when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Automatic Transmission in this section for additional information Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing Two Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is removed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe transmission damage Towing Four Wh
333. pants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee BeltAlert Programming BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps NOTE Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi
334. pen the rear door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all the door windows 021907282 Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position IB WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Feature The driver power window switch has an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening e
335. perature Control Operation 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Auto Set mode kno be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes nobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode nob to Auto Set temperature nobs for comfort to any speed be overridden for 10 minutes at a time Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature nobs for comfort Automatic User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable A C on or off Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort User selectable to any speed User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable A C on or off 81a12736 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMEN
336. phone es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the uconnect phone Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the uconnect phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete uconnect phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing a e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say uconnect Tutorial 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE xe Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the uconnect phone Voice
337. pical installation instructions 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces Latch Anchorages In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Tether Strap Mounting Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the t
338. pped Stop Light CHMSL M9 M2 20 Amp Trailer Lighting if Yellow equipped ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 Cav Car Mini Description Cav Car Mini Description ity tridge Fuse ity tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse M10 15 Amp Hands Free Module M15 20 Amp _ Multifunction Control Blue HFM if equipped Yellow Switch Cabin Compart Universal Garage Door ment Node CCN Opener UGDO if Steering Column Control equipped Vanity Light Module SCM Rear M11 10 Amp Automatic Temperature View Mirror Tire Pres Red Control ATC if sure Monitor TPM if equipped equipped IR Sensor if M12 30 Amp Radio Amplifier if uu Dus dd e Green _ equipped DOUe E EgUppe M13 20 Amp Cabin Compartment Mie E e o anms Yellow Node CCN Wireless E troller ORC Control Module WCM M17 15 Amp Exterior Lighting Left Multifunction Control Blue Front Park and Side Switch Marker Left Tail and M14 m Running License Lights 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cav Car Mini Description Cav Car Mini Description ity tridge Fuse ity tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse M18 15 Amp Exterior Lighting M23 10 Amp Left Horn Hi Low Blue Right Front Park and Red Side Marker Right Tail M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump and Running Lights Yellow M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Do
339. pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half sec ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door
340. program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the key from the ignition 2 Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then within five seconds press and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the EVIC if equipped 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to the memory setting by pressing the SET S button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE e For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi tions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC if equipped e For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph 0 km h to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted with the vehicle speed above 0 mph 0 km h a message will display in the EVIC if equipped en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory posi
341. pting the shift or while the shift attempt is in process then the indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry a shift move the WD Control Switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of offroad applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp 314 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG Se turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS When To Use 4WD LOW Range When off road driving shift to 4W
342. r Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over th
343. r ORC detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning e It is not advisa
344. r 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock If Equipped When on is selected you can use your RKE transmitter to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets When OFF is selected only the memory switch on the driver s door panel will recall memory profiles To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more information Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When on is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature To make your selection pr
345. r service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the uconnect phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the seco
346. radio display when the parking lights or headlights are on during daylight conditions Interior Light On Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat Off Rotate the dimmer control completely downward to the O OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS XX The windshield wiper washer control lever is S located on the right side of the steering column 81c0cc65 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the Park position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME they are operating The wipers will resume operation CAUTION Continued when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again e Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash
347. railer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 WARNING If the Gross Trailer Weight GTW is 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use a weight distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle If you use a standard weight carrying hitch you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly
348. rake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 15 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 Before the pointer reaches the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 16 4WD LOW Indicator If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in Lew the 4WD LOW mode In this mode the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 17 Hill Descent Control Indicator If Equipped The symbol indicates the status of the Hill D Descent Control HDC feature The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempt ing to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator light will flash on off 18 TOW HAUL Indicator If Equipped This light will illuminate when selecting TOW HAUL The TOW HAUL button is l
349. ransfer Case Position Indicator Lights The four wheel drive indicator lights 4WD 4 LOW are located in the instrument cluster The NEUTRAL indica tor light is located on the 4WD Control Switch If there is no indicator light on or flashing the transfer case posi tion is two wheel drive 2WD If the indicator light is on the desired position 4 WD AUTO 4WD LOW or NEU TRAL has been obtained If one or more shift requirements are not met e An indicator light will flash e The transfer case will not shift NOTE The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the electric shift four wheel drive system If this light re mains on after engine start up or it illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required 312 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG ME Shifting Procedures NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift the indicator light for the previous position will remain on and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift move the 4WD Control Switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again 2WD to 4WD Auto Move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD Auto can be done
350. rbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Occupant Classification Module OCM is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC The ORC uses the occupant category to determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are de The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com signed to activate only in certain side collisions and ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy rollover events When the ORC detects a collision ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle or both OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu sides of the vehicle for a rollover event A quantity of late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain modifications to
351. rd eI deans 435 Flashers Hazard Warning ccs s eem anina nes 394 Tum Signal 5 5 m RR 83 146 205 448 449 Flash To Pass o ceeace dene kto arrana koau 147 Flipper Glass Liftgate 00 0005 41 Flooded Engine Starting 292 Floor Console caue e dpud Chee Ses 185 Eh d Btak amp i e as nes denen ninan iiaa 452 Fluid Capacities 44 5 ie s buses n ee Re 450 Fluid Leaks 5 23 92 REY LEER 83 Fluid Level Checks 0 0005 431 432 Automatic Transmission ss 430 Brake 94 6 65 44 440 e d ben eR OX RR RHEE 429 Cooling System 6 3 lesse en es 423 Engine Oil i e ee die Cs m y em e 413 Power Steering 29 sca esc ea Bene eas 319 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 451 Fog Light Service llle 448 Fog Lights ss scenes RR 142 145 205 448 Folding Rear Seat 2 ee 133 Four Wheel Drive SHINE cessere ce ene 302 304 308 310 SYSTEMS due Waa hh et aae dr Rena 302 308 Four Wheel Drive Operation 302 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 389 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 389 Front Axle Differential lle 432 Fuel 2242203 204 mI eR tede DS Aes 365 POAC eile ot e Sateen vasto o fedi od boo dee 370 Additives assis timai We Pie ee Eee 4 368 Clean Alt sc sank ha ab ile aec ha SERES 366 Ethanol s 5 ssdbsac o awd dont ta Gn ene ted 366 Filler Cap Gas Cap 2 6 0 eee 370 Gasoline ssrds fia 4 oe RE a Aes 365 en IN
352. re driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load Continued UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Wi Instrument Panel Features 200 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Mi instrument Cluster 00040 201 uu Ro M E EN ll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And B Instrument Cluster Descriptions 202 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX lll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Jack geh Oe oe ge wee aes 227 If Equipped 6 eee 215 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 227 c VIII DUGHHAHOR S enaa EVIE 217 Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD Be nr ae Sn MOIS IgM And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 235 Oil Change Required sac arais ata nanas 218 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 238 Trip Functions 2 0 6 2c eee eee ee 219 List Button Compass Display seses ereescses esime ts 221 Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 240 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Info Butt
353. re failure Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar 348 STARTING AND OPERATING M
354. rear of the vehicle Press the switch forward and hold it the Sky Slider will open from the rear and move toward the front of the vehicle NOTE During operation any movement of the Sky Slider switch will stop the Sky Slider roof Closing the Sky Slider Using Automatic Mode Press and release the button in the center of the switch and the Sky Slider will close automatically from any position Using Operator Mode If the Sky Slider is open from the front press the switch forward and hold it the Sky Slider will move forward Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider travel at any point If the Sky Slider is open from the rear press the switch rearward and hold it and the Sky Slider will move rearward Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider travel at any point Manual Override The Sky Slider drive motors are mounted to the roof above the cargo lamp In the event that your vehicle losses battery power you can close the Sky Slider by turning the drive gears in the appropriate motor with a 6 mm Allen wrench To do so you must first remove the cargo lamp from the headliner Then insert the wrench into the Allen shaped hole in the appropriate motor and turn the wrench clockwise until the top closes ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 completely The left motor facing forward will close the top when it is open from the rear of the vehicle The right motor will close the top whe
355. result in damage or removal of paint and decals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped You can identify if your vehicle has Stain Repel Seat Fabric that makes spills easy to clean reduces odor from spills and reduces static by the presence of a tag on the side of the seat Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a cl
356. roof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
357. round in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle REAR WINDOW FEATURES 81c0cc61 Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped Rear Window Wiper Washer Control The Tear window wiper washer control is located on the The rotary ring switch on the lever controls rear wiper right side of the steering column and washer operation Rotate the switch upward to the first detent to activate the rear wiper Rotate the switch upward to the second detent to activate the rear washer The washer will continue to operate until you release the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 CAUTION Continued e In cold weather always turn off the rear wiper switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the switch Once released the wiper will cycle three times return to the park position and then resume normal operation NOTE The rear wiper will automatically return to the park position before turning off the engine If the park position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while it rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper is operating The rear wiper will resume operation when freezes to the window damage to the rear wiper you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup o
358. s NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Mix te Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost GH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost Floor or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary e Recirculation Control Use this button to block the flow of outside air from coming into the passenger compartment A light will illuminate when the system is in recirculation mode Only use the recirculation mode as a temporary means to block out any outside odors smoke or dust
359. s because the hitch ball will be 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SSS Vehicles Equipped with Rear Park Assist Switch System Operation You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off by The system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper pressing the Rear Park Assist switch located the lower fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in 200 cm away from switch bank below the climate controls the rear bumper fascia The warning display located above the rear window provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object Rear Park Assist Switch 032805242 Rear Park Assist LED Display ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the vehicle The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the display above the rear window When the ignition is turned to the ON position and the system is enabled the warning display will turn on all of its LEDs for approximately one second Then the system dimly illuminates the two inner most LEDs when it is detecting no obstacles The Rear Park Assist System is active when the ignition is in the ON position and the system is enabled and the driver shifts the transmission into the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed i
360. s eames E 319 Radiator Coolant Pressure 426 Car Washes cs 2 526429 ioei TG S044 CEP GA 435 Carbon Monoxide Warning 81 369 Cargo Area Cover 190 Cargo Area Features oesau taia ta aane huga 186 Cargo Compartment 0 0 0 0 e eee 186 Lib cess Puls URGE HOURS eI Oe 148 Cargo Wight os vost Her Ea eR REC ee 148 Cargo Load FIOO scotea sgae cintinai eee 186 Cargo Tie DOWNS iced eee bu ee gor RE es 188 Cargo Vehicle Loading 4 371 Cellular Phone 5 623 dk ee ewe hem em der 94 Certification Label isse des ege an 371 Changing A Flat Tue i222 R6 Re tania 395 Chart Tire Sizing ioi ce E RR ER ER 339 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 204411 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 81 Checks Satety sees eek tees 84 LES ESAE 81 Child Besttamt oessa dae hes Bete ees 71 72 76 78 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 74 76 Child Safety Locks danang t a i aii 33 Clean Air Gasoline 6 l l 366 Cleaning Windshield Wiper Blades 420 en INDEX 483 Climate Control ess vais calves pucr Rer uei 274 Clock i2 asta ee oh aid ea a es D 229 243 246 255 Coin Holder secre sehen bese aed 185 Cold Weather Operation 00 291 Command Trac Operation llle 302 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 273 Compact Spare Tire suck ah eared a 350 COMPASS tress es ace Pie ta dad dees de qot 221 Compass Cali
361. s leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Air Filter will reduce but not eliminate diesel and agricultural smells The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to the Maintenance Schedules in Section 8 of this manual for filter service intervals UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle Set the Fan control to the high position AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS full clockwise Press the button Set the Mode control at or between VERY HOT 7 and Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the gt button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near 7J and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 7 COOL OR COLD If it s sunny set the Mode
362. s less than 11 mph 18 km h The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER Inner LED 79 in 200 cm Yellow Sounds for 15 second 1st LED 5 in 130 cm Yellow None 2nd LED 45 in 115 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 31 5 in 80 cm 39 in 100 cm Yellow None 4th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 33 5 in 85 cm Yellow None 5th LED 20 in 50 cm 28 in 70 cm Yellow None 6th LED 16 in 40 cm 20 in 50 cm Red Intermittent 7th LED 6 in 15 cm 12 in 30 cm Red Continuous ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the
363. s that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tires The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure and loss of vehicle control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use only compact chains or other traction aids that
364. sh the door lock plunger on each vehicle belore closing the door PEN door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the NOTE The manual door locks will not lock or unlock door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward the liftgate P WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death p 9 Continued e Manual Lock Plunger 021807280 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued A power door lock switch is located on each of the front e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving door trim panels Use this switch to lock or unlock the unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a doors and liftgate number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle 021807281 Power Door Lock Switch Location 1 Unlock 2 Lock ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you
365. splayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func tion reset ALL will display during this three second window Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction A the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight com pass readings and the outside temperature Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as build ings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in P
366. ssary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase t
367. ssenger airbag is turned off and it will not inflate If the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated DO NOT assume the airbag is turned off and move the child restraint to the rear seat A deploying passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an Occupant Classification System children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint Passenger Air Front Passenger bag Disable Seat Occupant PAD Indicator Adtbag Status Light Adult OFF ON Grocery Bags Heavy Brief cases and Other ON OFF Relatively Light Objects Empty or Very Small Objects QE CHE Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors mounted in the base of the front passenger seat Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the system Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down on the seat will also be sensed The weight of an adult 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee will cause the system to turn the airbag on In this case the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an adult An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position with their feet on or near the floor in order to be properly classified Reclining the seat back too far may change how an oc
368. ssing the NEUTRAL selection button or while the shift attempt is in process then all of the mode position indicator lights will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch in not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 394 Spare Tire Removal 396 H If Your Engine Overheats 394 Preparations For Jacking H Jacking And Tire Changing 395 Jacking Instructions 000 Jack Location 29a such koala eed 396 W jump Starting 444 20 sz mn Spare Tire Stowage oa ec tescie r ipi su 396 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle 394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank below the climate controls A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher
369. ssing the Storage Bin NOTE The spring loaded latches that retain the storage bin cover to the cargo load floor should not be used as cargo tie downs es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 1 Flip the spring loaded latch pull loops up 4 Reinstall the cover with the handle recess facing toward you NOTE You can install the cover with either side facing upward 5 With the cover seated in the floor pull upward on 3 loops and twist them one quarter turn so that they are no longer parallel to the slots in the cover 6 Flip the loops down WARNING A loose storage bin cover thrown forward in a colli Cargo Load Floor Loops sion or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the 2 Pull the loops upward and twist them one quarter vehicle Always latch the storage bin cover to the turn so that they are parallel to the slots in the storage bin cargo load floor with the spring loaded latches when cover not accessing the storage bin 3 Lift the cover upward over the loops 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Cargo Tie Down Hooks and Loops The tie downs located on cargo area floor should be used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving Cargo Tie Down Loops Cargo tie down loops are located on the trim panels Cargo Tie Down Hooks en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 WARNING WARNING e Cargo tie downs are not safe anchors for a child The weight and
370. supported phones To call a name from downloaded or uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the uconnect phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the uconnect phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the uconnect phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The syste
371. t Available Vehicle Not in Park automatic transmission Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle in Motion manual transmission Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Liftgate Ajar with a single chime Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Section 5 of this manual for more details Service Park Assist System with a single chime Oil Change Required with a single chime Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 1
372. t be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Power Seat Switch For vehicles equipped with a power driver s seat use this switch to move the seat up down forward rearward or en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of a rear impact Adjust the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical The head restraints have a locking button that must be pushed inward to lower the head restraint However the head restraints may be raised without pushing in the button 81b7959a Adjustable Head Restraint 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats both the front driver and passenger seats The controls for the front heated seats are located on the instrument panel below the climate controls Heated Seat Switches After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off aif When High level heating is selected the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated The heat output then drops to the normal High level heating If High level heating is selected the system
373. t button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and
374. t ee eek 415 Door Locks 22er RR we RR 29 Door Locks Automatic 0000008 31 Door Opener Garage cicer crx Vs 165 TAVIS ue ac Eg deri ax dede ar 313 314 Off Pavement sss cir 26Le ge e e s 314 Off Road e e e ean 314 On Hillsi 24 aed gece E y aa CHR E RUE 314 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water st s aserite EARE E 314 When to Use Low Range 314 Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 180 Electrical Power Outlets 0 00 180 Electronic Brake Control System 324 Anti Lock Brake System 324 Brake Assist System 0 0000 325 Electronic Roll Mitigation 326 Electronic Stability Program 332 Traction Control System 325 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 326 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 155 Electronic Stability Program ESP 208 332 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 215 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher 394 Jacking ic ea sued tari oboe ae s os Og e s 395 Jump Starting 0 6 2 6 ee eee 402 Overheating 252b pae eps 394 TOWING useana Ke Bake SRE e PE MES 404 Emission Control System Maintenance 411 454 en INDEX 485 la p EST 409 Air Cleaner llle 416 Block Heater 4 221 gas RIS 293 Break In Recommendations 80 Checking Oil Le
375. t me chanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle eu E Ger ER EUER ERES 471 Prepare For The Appointment A71 Prepare A EISE ioeees amp o de cedo dee 471 Be Reasonable With Requests 471 H If You Need Assistance 0 471 Chrysler LLC Customer Center 472 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 472 In Mexico Coritact ossu m Be ae 472 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY Service Contract cee eee Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only BMOPARS Parts 425024 casteaw ees EE Bl Reporting Safety Defects In The 50 United States And Washington Du suede AN ha Gace hoc esas EE In Canada cec RIPE Wha he Bl Publication Order Forms M 475 470 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Traction Grades 0000000 477 Quality Grades 2 6 eee 476 Treadweaf ecu caede ge oy tea va 477 Temperature Grades sess 478 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 471 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right p
376. t of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the 326 STARTING AND OPERATING xe benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake an
377. t the transfer case to 4WD LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the front wheels slowly left and right This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case to AWD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountai
378. tation Dres cueste CA ee VR ee Pw A 355 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 82 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 83 Safety Defects Reporting 474 Safety Exhaust Gas Safety Information Tire 00 337 Safety LIPS user dE as Sane dey o ene RIS ay doas 81 Satellite Radio Antenna 00 267 Satellite Radio uconnect studios 266 Schedule Maintenance seen 454 Seat Belt Maintenance llle 440 Seat Belt Reminder essere 49 Seat Belts setie sii edd rar PEE 43 82 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 47 And Pregnant Women 0006 52 Child Restraint 0 0 00 00000 ee 71 78 Extender 2 2222 2c 9 eR hd 52 Front Seat 2 259 ad awake ad Sebo need es 43 INSPECHON iue er tee s eerte e wads 82 Pretensioners sasasi sess aberas eee eee 49 Reminder eea nasede eMe RE ER 213 Shoulder Belt Anchorage 47 Untwisting Procedure 496 INDEX MM ri PR bial selene Ae PER ENEE oS 127 Adjistm nt a5 9 4 foo deg ea EE oe ee dus 127 basy ENY 5e ec oame TS MERE nea 139 Head Restraints llle 131 Heated des se giants Ah s es ctr CR acca aS 132 Height Adjustment cess cersesc catered 130 Lumbar Support eer Rer 129 Memory v e epu ch d x RE edP ida en 136 Io orar bara dh agate TT 130 Rear Folding 42 tet24iee tea ede Ree 133 Reclining 3 ans gees Savas deb BUPA e HR Sos a e 128 Se
379. te the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 344 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG Se 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely e The following table shows examples on how to calcu exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities calculated in Step 4 of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the c
380. tect passengers from loose cargo The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the cargo area behind the top of the rear seats The cover when extended covers the cargo area to keep items out of sight Notches in the trim panels near the liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in use You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to make more room in the cargo area To install the cover position it in the vehicle so that the flat side of the housing faces upward Then insert either the left or the right spring loaded post located on the ends of the cover housing into either of the left or the right attachment points shown ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Sea Next grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward you As the cover nears the liftgate opening guide the rear attachment posts on both ends of the cover into the notches in the trim panels Then lower the cover to position the posts into the bottom of the notches and release the handle Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover Then insert the spring loaded post on the opposite end of the cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly a
381. ted Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your uconnect phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the uconnect phone When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say 3 7 4 6 t Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service cen ter menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The uconnect phone will then
382. tems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the instrument clus ter Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight ened Press the trip odometer RESET button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damage
383. tenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON e The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight second interval The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deploy ment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash
384. ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed i e functional RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm To Unlatch the Liftgate Flip Up Window Press the REAR RELEASE button twice to unlatch the liftgate flip up window WARNING To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass will automatically rise Express Down Window Feature If Equipped Th
385. ter the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See uconnect website for
386. th the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed i e functional RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Illumination Approach under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 To Lock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to ac
387. the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return
388. the OCS both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared If an object is ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity and occupant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time that it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the ai
389. the engine and be sure to turn the key to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate Only second gear range will operate in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your autho rized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ME FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION MP1522 Command Trac Transfer Case If Equipped Operating Information and Precautions The Command Trac transfer case provides four posi tions e Two wheel drive 2WD high range e Four wheel drive 4WD LOCK high range e Four wheel drive AWD LOW low range e Neutral N This transfer case is intended to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and high way conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required select the tr
390. the proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 386 STARTING AND OPERATING x WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four
391. then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESP TCS Indicator Light will blink sev eral times to confirm HSA is disabled 9 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in off road driving conditions by applying the brakes when necessary When enabled HDC senses the terrain and activates when the vehicle is descending a hill HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected Gear Approximate HDC Set Speed 1st 1 mph 1 5 km h 2nd 3 mph 4 5 km h DRIVE 7 5 mph 12 km h REVERSE 1 mph 1 5 km h NEUTRAL 3 mph 4 5 km h However the driver can override HDC operation by applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed If more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle at the original set speed NOTE HDC is available on vehicles equipped with the MP1522 transfer case e The transfer case must be in 4WD LOW range to enable HDC e HDC is enabled only when the Hill Descent Control Indicator Light
392. tion A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE When BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked However the belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt from the buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensi tive emergency locking mode Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feat
393. tion 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver seat will stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the key from the ignition switch e When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver s seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 68 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position e When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver s seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 23 mm and 68 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver s seat position is less than 0 9 in 23 mm forward of the rear st
394. to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasin
395. to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the rad
396. tomatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord e The engine block heater cord is found under the hood clipped to the heater line on the left side of the engine 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Continued e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are into any forward gear when the engine is above expected to last for several days idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION is firml
397. ton Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 f
398. ton will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX J ACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate foe oe FARIS El GI 042305233 RES RSC Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to
399. top The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 WARNING Continued e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others CAUTION The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly in stalled aftermarket radios or telephones NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the ABS is functioning Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictable braking action longer stopping dis tances or brake damage When descending mountains or hills repeated brak ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos sible Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm up which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehicle control Be especially careful while driving on slippery roads in close quarter maneuver ing parking or stopping Do not drive too fast for road conditions especially when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can 324 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG ME build up between the tire tr
400. transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this trans ceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or as sistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro
401. try in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All uconnect Phonebook Entries Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the uconnect Phonebook 3 e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available To call one of the names in the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the uconnect phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellula
402. ts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE x the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Sli
403. u acd 24 Alarm Security Alarm iilis 18 214 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio less 267 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 424 425 450 Disposal je iso hb ete Aa aS ee ea es 427 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 321 324 Anti Lock Warning Light 206 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Anti Theft System xcd e ee hr RR AS 214 Appearance Care sss eb Rr eR Eds 435 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Assist Hull Start i22 acus 328 Assistance Towing sus 6 0 ee eee eee eee 108 Auto Down Power Windows 35 Auto Unlock Doors der paer iis 32 Automatic Dimming Mirror 90 Automatic Door Locks 00005 31 32 en INDEX 481 Automatic Headlights 00 143 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 212 218 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 277 Automatic Transaxle llle 294 Special Additives 2 dee RR 431 Automatic Transmission 296 430 431 Adding Fluid z sete tente x 431 452 Fluid and Filter Changes 430 431 Fluid Change cess ce REPRE RR ces 431 Fluid Level Check siio e 430 Fluid Type e es desig Sates dna alate ete debes 452 Gear Ranges 4452s ebur Ry nd ee 297 Special Additives sess 431 Torque Converter 0 0 0 emerus 301 Auxiliary
404. ufacturer ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 475 To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Wash ington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts 4
405. ugh several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing If the MIL flashes when the engine is running serious conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 7 High Beam Indicator E This indicator shows that the high beam head T lights are on Pull the multifunction control lever on the left side of the steering column toward you to switch to low beam 8 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the fog lights are on 9 Speedometer Shows the vehicle speed 10 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about 1 mile 1 6 km with the turn signals on a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 11 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch o
406. up ported phones For uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect or call 1 877 855 8400 uconnect allows you to transfer calls between the sys tem and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone uconnect features en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s uconnect phone The uconnect phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone uy for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button e Actual button locatio
407. ur seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel The side curtain airbags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows Side Remote Acceleration Sensors Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Front Acceleration Sensors Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner and Retractor If Equipped e Occupant Classification System OCS Front Pas senger Seat Only Occupant Classification Module OCM Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light Weight Sensors How the Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal side or rollover collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size The ORC receives this dat
408. ure in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly automatic locking retrac tor feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long
409. urity Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If the previously described arming sequence has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the vehicle If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The interior lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open a door This feature also turns on the approach lighting if so equipped For details refer to Illumination Approach 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON NOTE e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate the interior lights if the dimmer control is in the extreme downward position RE
410. urn this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission is in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 3 Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with l
411. ust be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle Parking Brake Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the shift lever is in the PARK position When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK Otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an e Always apply the parking brake fully when leav uphill grade ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in the PARK position Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dan The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the gerous for a number of reasons A child or others driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse 5 could be injured Do not leave the keys in the braking conditions The system operates with a separate ignition A child could operate power windows computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent other controls or move the vehicle wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged surfaces before driving failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to
412. utton to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air con ditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the LED in the CONTROL button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the RECIRCULATION button to return to out side air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on
413. ved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Continued Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility t
414. vel lessen 413 Compariment secs eseo be ee x ew eesis 409 Coolant Antifreeze llle 423 451 Cooling oeeie erin becas Edd RT 423 Exhaust Gas Caution sess 81 369 Fails to Statt 3 te hei hon a Aen cem deus 292 Flooded Starting seemed 292 Fuel Requirements 0005 365 Jump Starting cere eee 402 OMIT 413 450 451 Oil Change Interval 212 218 414 Oil Filler Cap ces diedlepe RR ER 415 Cil Filt r s sven a ca re EEUU 415 Oil Filter Disposal esses 415 Oil Selection llle 414 450 Oil Synthetic ie cep oc tas Re i nb s 415 Overheating 6 2 0 eai eee 394 DATING coated erg ved edP T S ME SU 291 Temperature Gauge liliis 209 Engine Oil Viscosity 0 00 eee eee 415 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 415 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 66 Entry System Illuminated 19 Ethanol senne nesena A S a 366 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 81 369 421 Exhaust System 6 0 nara dina eee 81 421 Exterior Finish Care ss ce 0 0 0 0000 cee hisa 435 Exterior Lightsy ne 2da0 es la n RSS Ges 83 Fabric Care 2 ee eee 438 Filler Location Fuel 0 0 00 000 370 Filters Air Cleaner deg a p a ba wo we A 416 Air Conditioning 00005 284 419 TEM 486 INDEX MM Engine Oll uices Rp eR Ex s 415 451 Engine Oil Disposal sess 415 Finish Care incdus ebeauerd e
415. ves the updated tire pres sures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 360 STARTING AND OPE RAT NG Se 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn
416. w which cellular of certain radios phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the e Press the PHONE button to begin uconnect phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call Call by Saying a Name e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call Dial by Saying a Number e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ Dial ously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the uconnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e Af
417. wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399 A G9 69 v Jack Warning Label 1 Remove spare tire 2 Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket As semble the tools by connecting the driver to the exten sion and then to the lug wrench 3 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se 4 Locate the jack as shown For the front tires place it rearward of the notch on the body weld seam behind wheel to be changed For the rear tires place it under the axle by the wheel to be changed Position the jack handle on the jack Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 801354b4 Rear Jacking
418. will automatically switch to Low level heating after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of indi cator lights changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the Low level heating will also turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 minutes Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 NOTE When a heat setting is selected heat will be felt 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat within two to five minutes Feature To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be WARNING folded flat This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin 6 E because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex to position the front seat to its mid track position Also haustion or other physical condition must exercise be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi care when using the seat heater It may cause burns tioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down even at low temperatures especially if used for easily long periods Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat suc
419. will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual SKY SLIDER FULL LENGTH OPEN ROOF The Sky Slider is a full length soft top power roof that opens front to rear or rear to front ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Sky Slider Usage Precautions NOTE e The system will not operate when ambient tempera ture is at 4 F 20 C or lower e The system will not operate at vehicle speeds of 86 mph 138 km h or above e Opening and closing the Sky Slider repeatedly with out the engine running may run the battery down CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the Sky Slider vehicle contents and the vehicle interior e Never attempt to open or close the Sky Slider when it is frozen Wait until the Sky Slider is thawed before operating Continued CAUTION Continued e Opening the Sky Slider when damp wet or dirty can cause stains mildew and damage to the soft top material and the inside of your vehicle Make sure the Sky Slid
420. windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor de frost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the CONTROL button to blink and then turn off en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation mode by pressing the RECIRCULATION button However under certain conditions while in Auto matic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the RECIRCULATION button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into recirculation mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation mode you must first move the Mode Knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the RECIRCULATION button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Secti
421. witch labeled 1 within five seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped will display which memory position is being set If desired a second memory profile can be stored into memory as follows 1 Turn the ignition ON 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences i e seat side mirror and radio station presets 3 Press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press the side of the rocker switch labeled 2 within five seconds The EVIC if equipped will display which memory position is being set NOTE e For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile e For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph 0 km h to recall a memory profile The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be turned on and off through the EVIC if equipped For details refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Linking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To
422. wn ASD M26 10 Amp Power Mirror Switch Natural fl and 2 Red Driver Window Switch M20 15 Amp Interior Lighting Steering M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch Wireless Blue Wheel Switches if Red Control Module WCM equipped Switch Bank Steering Column Lock if Electronic Vehicle Infor equipped m PUMA mgr 10 Amp Powertrain Control Mod equippe Red ule PCM MER LUE OSA DEINEN M2 10 Amp Occupant Classification e ow Red Module OCM M22 10 Amp Right Horn Hi Low Red ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 lation and Air Condition ing HVAC Module if equipped Compass Mod ule if equipped Cav Car Mini Description Cav Car Mini Description ity tridge Fuse ity tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module if M35 10 Amp Heated Mirrors if Blue equipped Diagnostic Red equipped Link M36 M31 20 Amp Back Up Lights M37 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Yellow Red ABS Electronic Stability M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con Program ESP Module Red troller ORC Stop Light Switch M33 10 Amp Powertrain Control Mod M38 25 Amp Door and Liftgate Lock Red ule PCM Natural Unlock Motors M34 10 Amp Park Assist Module if Red equipped Heating Venti 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e When installing the Integrated Power Module cover it is important to ensure t
423. wo things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE
424. xperience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the man
425. y on the brake pedal CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed Always press the brake pedal first before moving the shift lever out of PARK Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal pressed To operate the shift lock manual override perform the following steps 1 Turn the key to the ON position but do not start the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel
426. you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap e Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connec when the radiator is hot tors disconnected for prolonged periods e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or e Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently e Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi tions 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A C condenser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine
427. ze only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 ATT Se 445 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 dg cuc M 24 2205 16 112 96 80 64 y 56 48 WMA Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected

Jeep 2009 Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents